You are on page 1of 1242

J.D.

Edwards Distribution Center


User Manual

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Table of Contents for DC


Preface......................................................................................................................................... 1-1 J.D. Edwards Common Foundations ....................................................................................... 1-1 Warehouse Layout Definitions ................................................................................................ 1-5 Daily Balancing Shipments and Receipts to the Battery Activity Report ............................... 1-7 PARC Process........................................................................................................................ 1-11 Sales Order Entry Module ........................................................................................................ 2-1 How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG ................................................................................ 2-1 How to Enter Orders to Exide Non JDE (EO)....................................................................... 2-11 How to Enter a Complimentary Sales SP .............................................................................. 2-17 How to Enter a Transfer Order to JDE DC ST/OT................................................................ 2-23 How to Enter an Order for Test Batteries TS ........................................................................ 2-27 How to Assign a Pick Number............................................................................................... 2-33 How to Assign Pick Numbers for Backorders....................................................................... 2-37 How to Create a Backorder in Advance (Split Loads) .......................................................... 2-41 How to Release a Backorder Batch ....................................................................................... 2-45 How to Temporarily Change a Ship To................................................................................. 2-49 How to Add to an Existing Order .......................................................................................... 2-53 How to Cancel Lines on an Existing Order ........................................................................... 2-57 Truck Routing Module .............................................................................................................. 3-1 How to Route Using Truck Stops ............................................................................................ 3-1 How to Manually Route an Order............................................................................................ 3-3 How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip (Route) ............................................................... 3-11 How to Manually Remove a Pick from a Trip....................................................................... 3-15 How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip .................................................................. 3-17 How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen.......................................................................... 3-19 How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment Trip Build Screen........................... 3-23 How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen ................................................................. 3-25 Planning Module ........................................................................................................................ 4-1 How to Enter Pre-Finished Production Scheduling ................................................................. 4-1 How to Change a Trip Run Date.............................................................................................. 4-7 How to Enter Pick Production Scheduling .............................................................................. 4-9 How to Inquire on PF Production Scheduling ....................................................................... 4-13 How to Inquire on a Pick Production Schedule ..................................................................... 4-15 Order Fulfillment Module......................................................................................................... 5-1 How to Process Pre-Finished Production ................................................................................ 5-1 How to Unproduce Pre-Finished Batteries .............................................................................. 5-7 How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries....................................................................................... 5-13 How to Perform Pick Verification ......................................................................................... 5-27 How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification .......................................................................... 5-31 How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification ....................................................................... 5-39 How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification .............................................................. 5-47 How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification .................................................................. 5-53 How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification ............................................................... 5-57 How to Reprint a Pallet Label from the DC Operations Menu.............................................. 5-63 How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance................................................................................. 5-69 How to Use Full Pallet Picking.............................................................................................. 5-77 i

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Truck Loading Through Confirm Shipment Module ............................................................ 6-1 How to Perform Truck Loading............................................................................................... 6-1 How to Un-Truck Load............................................................................................................ 6-9 How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents) .......................................... 6-13 How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory) ...................................................... 6-17 How to Reprint Documents ................................................................................................... 6-21 Stock Receiving Module ............................................................................................................ 7-1 How to Receive by Serial Number .......................................................................................... 7-1 How to Receive by Purchase Order ......................................................................................... 7-9 How to Reverse by Serial Number ........................................................................................ 7-15 How to Unreceive by Purchase Order ................................................................................... 7-19 How to Use Directed Receipt ................................................................................................ 7-23 Stock Adjustments Module ....................................................................................................... 8-1 How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N) .................................................................... 8-1 How to Perform an Inventory to Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)............................................ 8-9 How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E).......................................................... 8-15 How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)......................................................... 8-19 How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H) ........................................................ 8-23 How to Perform a Recover from Blem Adjustment (P) ........................................................ 8-27 How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC) ................................................................. 8-31 How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR) ............................................................... 8-35 How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)..................................................................... 8-39 How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF) .................................................................... 8-43 How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)....................................................................... 8-47 How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)...................................................... 8-51 Stock Moves Module.................................................................................................................. 9-1 How to Perform a Computer Directed Move........................................................................... 9-1 How to Perform a Regular Move From a Rack to the Picking Area .................................... 9-9 How to Perform a Regular Move From a Multiple Storage Location to a Rack Location. 9-13 How to Perform a Regular Move From a Type Location to a Multiple Storage Location. 9-15 How to Perform a Regular Move From a Reject Repair to a Multiple Storage Location .. 9-19 How to Perform Boost In (From Multiple to Eaches) ........................................................... 9-23 How to Perform Boost Out (From Eaches to Multiple)......................................................... 9-25 How to Create Transfer Labels Using Boost Out .................................................................. 9-27 How to Unproduce Transfer Labels Using Boost In ............................................................. 9-31 How to Perform a Directed Putaway Move........................................................................... 9-33 Cycle Count Module ................................................................................................................ 10-1 How to Perform a Cycle Count.............................................................................................. 10-1 How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number.............................................................. 10-5 How to Perform Stock Locator Moves .................................................................................. 10-7 How to Enter Final Count Keying ....................................................................................... 10-11 How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions ................................................................... 10-15 Physical Inventory Module ..................................................................................................... 11-1 How to Begin a Physical Inventory ....................................................................................... 11-1 How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Numbers .......................................................... 11-17 How to Perform Tag Keying................................................................................................ 11-21 How to Perform Serialized Pallet Maintenance................................................................... 11-25 How to Submit an Inventory Tags Report ........................................................................... 11-29 How to Submit a Variance Detail Report ............................................................................ 11-31 ii

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Post Physical Inventory........................................................................................... 11-33 How to Perform Stock Locator Moves ................................................................................ 11-35 DC Set Up Module ................................................................................................................... 12-1 How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location .......................................................................... 12-1 How to Change/Delete a Branch/Plant Location ................................................................. 12-11 How to View Default Location Maintenance ...................................................................... 12-17 How to Enter a Work Day Calendar .................................................................................... 12-19 How to Print Location Labels .............................................................................................. 12-21 How to Print Text Labels..................................................................................................... 12-25 Technical Operations Module................................................................................................. 13-1 How to Start Printers.............................................................................................................. 13-1 How to Vary Off Device........................................................................................................ 13-3 How to Vary On Device ........................................................................................................ 13-7 How to Work with Active Printers ........................................................................................ 13-9 How to Work with Device Status ........................................................................................ 13-13 How to Work with User Spooled Files ................................................................................ 13-17 How to Work with Query .................................................................................................... 13-21 How to Reboot Your Scanner .............................................................................................. 13-23 Purchase Orders Module ........................................................................................................ 14-1 How to Enter Non-Inventory/Supplier (OP).......................................................................... 14-1 How to Enter an Inventory/Supplier (OF) ........................................................................... 14-13 How to Enter a Capital Equip, Sanction (OS) ..................................................................... 14-17 How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)........................................................................... 14-21 How to Enter a Receipt from Exide Non-JDE (EI) ............................................................. 14-29 How to Add/Change an Existing Inventory/Supplier (OF) PO ........................................... 14-33 How to Cancel Lines on POs (Existing Inventory POs)...................................................... 14-37 How to Change POs/Non-Inventory (OP) ........................................................................... 14-41 How to View Orders Awaiting Approval ............................................................................ 14-45 How to Use the Approval Review Option ........................................................................... 14-49 How to Use Approval Delegation........................................................................................ 14-53 PARC Order Processing Module ........................................................................................... 15-1 How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS .................................................................................... 15-1 How to Enter a Credit Refused CR..................................................................................... 15-9 How to Enter a Credit Damage CD .................................................................................. 15-15 How to Enter a Credit Only CC........................................................................................... 15-23 How to Enter a Credit Stocklift CL .................................................................................. 15-29 How to Enter a Credit Rotations CP ................................................................................. 15-35 How to Enter a Kmart Credit Rotations CP...................................................................... 15-41 How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ ....................................................................... 15-47 How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ ............................................................ 15-55 How to Confirm Credits....................................................................................................... 15-63 How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG ............................................................................ 15-67 How to Enter Employee/Casual Sales SX ........................................................................... 15-75 How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO ....................................................................... 15-81 How to Enter Junk Shipments to Smelter SI ....................................................................... 15-89 How to Enter Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT........................................................................... 15-95 How to Assign a Pick Number............................................................................................. 15-99

iii

Exide Technologies, Inc.

PARC Truck Routing Module................................................................................................ 16-1 How to Manually Route an Order.......................................................................................... 16-1 How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip ............................................................................ 16-9 How to Manually Remove a Pick from a Trip..................................................................... 16-13 How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip ................................................................ 16-15 How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen........................................................................ 16-19 How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment Trip Build Screen......................... 16-23 How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen ............................................................... 16-27 PARC Order Fulfillment Module........................................................................................... 17-1 How to Perform Pick Verification ......................................................................................... 17-1 How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification .......................................................................... 17-7 How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification ..................................................................... 17-15 How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification ............................................................ 17-23 How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification ................................................................ 17-29 How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification ............................................................. 17-33 How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance............................................................................... 17-39 PARC Truck Loading Through Confirm Shipment Module .............................................. 18-1 How to Perform Truck Loading............................................................................................. 18-1 How to Un-Truck Load.......................................................................................................... 18-9 How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents) ........................................ 18-15 How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory) .................................................... 18-21 How to Reprint Documents ................................................................................................. 18-25 PARC Stock Adjustments Module ......................................................................................... 19-1 How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N) .................................................................. 19-1 How to Perform a Corporate Junk Adjustment (J) ................................................................ 19-9 How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)........................................................ 19-15 How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)....................................................... 19-21 How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H) ...................................................... 19-27 How to Perform a Recover from Blem (P) .......................................................................... 19-33 How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC) ............................................................... 19-39 How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR) ............................................................. 19-45 How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)................................................................... 19-49 How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF) .................................................................. 19-55 How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)..................................................................... 19-61 How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW).................................................... 19-67 PARC Cycle Count Module .................................................................................................... 20-1 How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number.............................................................. 20-7 How to Perform Stock Locator Moves .................................................................................. 20-9 How to Enter Final Count Keying ....................................................................................... 20-13 How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions ................................................................... 20-17 PARC Technical Operations Module..................................................................................... 21-1 How to Work with Active Printers ........................................................................................ 21-1 How to Work with User Spooled Files .................................................................................. 21-7 Sales Order Reports Module................................................................................................... 22-1 How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report ................................................................ 22-1 How to Run a Customer Backorders Report.......................................................................... 22-7 How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report ..................................................................... 22-11 How to Run an Open Orders Report Sum by Day Report................................................... 22-13 How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Sams) ............................................................ 22-15 iv

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Wal-Mart) ...................................................... 22-21 Material Team Reports Module ............................................................................................. 23-1 How to Print Inventory POs................................................................................................... 23-1 How to Print Specific Inventory POs..................................................................................... 23-7 How to Reprint Specific Inventory POs ................................................................................ 23-9 How to Run a Purchased Inventory on Order Report .......................................................... 23-11 How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report ..................................................................... 23-13 How to Run an Open Inventory POs by Vendor ................................................................. 23-15 How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report.................................................................... 23-17 How to Run a Monthly Conversion List Report.................................................................. 23-21 Operations Team Reports Module ......................................................................................... 24-1 How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Basic) Report .................................................... 24-1 How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Finished) Report ............................................... 24-5 How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Components) Report......................................... 24-7 How to Run a Costed Stock Status Report ............................................................................ 24-9 How to Run a Purchased Inventory on Order Report .......................................................... 24-11 How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report ................................................................ 24-13 How to Run a Daily Orders Report DC Report ................................................................... 24-14 How to Run a Daily Orders Report by Customer Report .................................................... 24-17 How to Run a Production Recap by Line/User Report........................................................ 24-19 How to Run a Battery Activity Report ................................................................................ 24-23 How to Run a P.O.R.S. ........................................................................................................ 24-25 How to Run a DC Summary Report .................................................................................... 24-27 How to Run a Plant Shipments Report ................................................................................ 24-29 How to Run a Customer Service Report/Branch Ops Report.............................................. 24-31 How to Run a Customer Service Reports by Branch Report............................................... 24-33 How to Run a Customer Service Reports by Parent # Report ............................................. 24-35 How to Run a Fill % by Business Unit/Ship To Report ...................................................... 24-37 How to Run Fill % by Ship To Report ................................................................................ 24-41 How to Run a Fill % by SKU # Report ............................................................................... 24-45 How to Run a Finishing Line Schedule Report ................................................................... 24-49 How to Run a History by User Name Report ...................................................................... 24-51 How to Run a Recap of Batteries by Trip Report................................................................ 24-53 Stock Locator Reports Module............................................................................................... 25-1 How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report........................................................................ 25-1 How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report ....................................................................... 25-7 How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report ..................................................................... 25-9 How to Run a Single Type Lookup Report ......................................................................... 25-11 How to Run a Stock Locator by Location Report................................................................ 25-13 How to Run a Stock Locator by Manufacturing Date Report ............................................. 25-15 How to Run a Stock In Transit by Type Report .................................................................. 25-17 How to Run a Stock History by Transaction Date Report................................................... 25-19 How to Run a Stock History by Serial Number Report....................................................... 25-21 How to Run a Stock Move History Report.......................................................................... 25-23 Routing Reports Module ......................................................................................................... 26-1 How to Run a Trip Number Tracking Report........................................................................ 26-1 How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed Report ......................................................... 26-5 How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Summary Report ..................................................... 26-11 How to Run an Orders Without Pick Numbers Report........................................................ 26-15 v

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Non-Shipped Order Summary Report .......................................................... 26-21 How to Run a Pre-Finished Customer Detail Report........................................................... 26-23 How to Run a Non-PF Customer Detail Report .................................................................. 26-25 How to Run a Purged Trip Numbers Report ....................................................................... 26-27 How to Run a Loaded Truck Report.................................................................................... 26-31 Reconciliation Reports Module .............................................................................................. 27-1 How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report .................................................................. 27-1 How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report..................................................................... 27-3 How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report .............................................................. 27-7 How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Components) Report ........................................................ 27-9 How to Run an RMA Returns Report.................................................................................. 27-13 How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report ........................................................ 27-15 How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report ....................................................................... 27-19 How to Run a Battery Activity Report ................................................................................ 27-21 How to Run a Ship by Trip Report ...................................................................................... 27-25 How to Run a Transfer Order by Receiving Report ............................................................ 27-27 How to Run a Transfer Order by Shipping Report .............................................................. 27-29 How to Run an N Conversion (Type to Type) Report......................................................... 27-31 How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report............................................................................. 27-35 How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report............................................................................ 27-39 How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report ............................................................ 27-43 How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report.................................................................... 27-47 How to Run an ST/OT Report Shipping Report............................................................... 27-51 How to Run an ST/OT Report - Receiving Report.............................................................. 27-53 Sales Order Inquiries Module................................................................................................. 28-1 How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen ................................................................ 28-1 How to Use the Sales Ledger Inquiry Screen ........................................................................ 28-9 How to Use the Delivery Notes Inquiry Screen................................................................... 28-15 How to Use the EDI-Display Download Runtimes Inquiry Screen .................................... 28-19 How to Use the Item Cross-Reference Inquiry Screen........................................................ 28-21 How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen ....................................................... 28-25 How to Use the Detailed Availability Inquiry Screen ......................................................... 28-29 Material Team Inquiries Module ........................................................................................... 29-1 How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen....................................... 29-1 How to Use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) Inquiry Screen ............................................... 29-9 How to Use the Open Orders Transfers (OT) Inquiry Screen ............................................. 29-15 How to Use the Receipt Inquiry Screen............................................................................... 29-19 How to Use the PO/Receiving Audit Trail Inquiry Screen.................................................. 29-23 How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen .......................................................... 29-27 Operations Team Inquiries Module ....................................................................................... 30-1 How to Use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) Inquiry Screen................................................... 30-1 How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen ......................................................... 30-7 How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen .......................................................... 30-11 Stock Locator Inquiries Module............................................................................................. 31-1 How to Use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry Screen ........................................................ 31-1 How to Use the Serial Number Lookup Inquiry Screen ........................................................ 31-7 How to Use the Single Location Lookup Inquiry Screen ...................................................... 31-9 How to Use the Single Type Lookup Inquiry Screen .......................................................... 31-11 How to Use the Stock Locator by Location Inquiry Screen ................................................ 31-13 vi

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Stock Locator by Mfg. Date Inquiry Screen.............................................. 31-15 How to Use the Stock In Transit by Type Inquiry Screen................................................... 31-17 How to Use the Stock History by Trans. Date Inquiry Screen ............................................ 31-19 How to Use the Stock History by Serial Number Inquiry Screen ....................................... 31-21 How to Use the Stock Move History Inquiry Screen .......................................................... 31-23 Routing Inquiries Module ....................................................................................................... 32-1 How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen.......................................................................... 32-1 How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Dept. Screen ........................................................... 32-7 How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Date Inquiry Screen.............................................. 32-11 Planning Inquiries Module ..................................................................................................... 33-1 How to Use the Enter/Change Forecast ................................................................................. 33-1 How to Use the Item Master Information .............................................................................. 33-3 How to Use the Supply and Demand..................................................................................... 33-5 How to Use the Multi-Level BOM Inquiry ........................................................................... 33-7 How to Use the Multi-Level Where Used ............................................................................. 33-9 PARC Reports Module............................................................................................................ 34-1 How to Run a Battery Activity Report .................................................................................. 34-1 How to Run an RMA Returns Report.................................................................................... 34-7 How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report .................................................................. 34-9 How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report ..................................................................... 34-11 How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report................................................................... 34-13 How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report ............................................................ 34-17 How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report ........................................................ 34-23 How to Run a Daily Orders Report PARC Report .............................................................. 34-29 How to Run a Daily Orders Report by Customer Report .................................................... 34-31 How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report .............................................................. 34-33 How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report ....................................................................... 34-35 How to Run a Ship By Trip Report ..................................................................................... 34-39 How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report...................................................................... 34-41 How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report ..................................................................... 34-43 How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report ................................................................... 34-47 How to Run a Single Type Lookup Report ......................................................................... 34-51 How to Run a Stock Locator by Location Report................................................................ 34-53 How to Run a Stock In Transit by Type Report .................................................................. 34-55 How to Run a Stock History by Transaction Date Report................................................... 34-57 How to Run a Conversion (Type to Type) Report............................................................... 34-59 How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report............................................................................. 34-63 How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report............................................................................ 34-67 How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report ............................................................ 34-71 How to Run a Non-Shipped Order Summary Report .......................................................... 34-75 How to Run a Credit Orders Less than 560 Report ............................................................. 34-77

vii

Exide Technologies, Inc.

viii

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Preface
J.D. Edwards Common Foundations
Introduction
This section provides a foundation in J.D. Edwards to execute the task necessary to perform Exides business foundations.

Signing on
At the sign-on window, enter your user ID and password. The User ID, depending on your facility, is one of the following: The first three letters of your first name followed by the first three letters of your last name, or, The first six letters of your last name, your first initial, and your middle initial.

The first time to sign on, your password will be the same as your User ID.

J.D. Edwards Common Foundations

1-1

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Menu screen
Below is an example of a menu screen and its various components. This screen, the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu, displays several menu options and a command line at the bottom in which a menu option can be entered.

Hidden Selections
Hidden selections are operations that are accessible by entering a specified number on the command line. Entering HS on the command line displays a list of the hidden selections available. The table below lists the most commonly used hidden selections. Hidden Selection 25 33 34 42 43 50 60 80 88 90 Description Displays the menu specifications Displays jobs submitted to batch Displays system messages Displays the JOBQ Displays the print queue Displays current calendar Displays screen to send messages Maintain Default Branch Location Change Password Signs off the system

1-2

J.D. Edwards Common Foundations

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Screen Layout
This screen displays several different types of fields, including the Action Code field.

Action Codes
There are three possible action codes to enter in the action code field. Action code A I C Description Adds information to the system Inquires on information that exists within the system Changes existing information in the system

Function Keys
Function keys are used to access additional forms, functions, or menus. A PC keyboard has 12 function keys and a Dumb Terminal keyboard has 24. The table below lists the most commonly used function keys with the keystroke per type of keyboard. Dumb Terminal F1 F3 F4 F7 F12 F15 F22 F24 PC F1 F3 F4 F7 F12 Shift + F3 Shift + F10 Shift + F12 Description Field Sensitive Help Exit to Menu Display Detail Area View Error Text Previous Menu/Screen Sales Order Header Clear Screen Display All Function Keys

J.D. Edwards Common Foundations

1-3

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Tip: To use functions F13-F24 on the PC keyboard, subtract the number 12 from the function number to determine the correct key to press. For example, to use the F22 function, press Shift + F10.

Search Types
Search types are used in the Name Search window to narrow the search selection. Search Type C CF L V M Description DC customer Branch customer Location (Exide) Vendor Freight carrier

1-4

J.D. Edwards Common Foundations

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Warehouse Layout Definitions


Receiving
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse is 9999Z. The receiving location allows the storage of multiple serial numbers. Physical Location - The area outside specified doors. Purpose - Receiving is the area of the warehouse that pallets of batteries are staged after being unloaded from the truck.

Racks
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse. An example is 0101A to 8132D. These locations allow for only one serial number to reside in the location at a time. Physical Location - The racks in the warehouse. Examples: Racks 12 to 15 are designated as prefinished, racks 27 to 32 are for the storage of motorcycle batteries; all others are for storage of basic batteries. Purpose - These locations are for the storage of pallets that have not been opened.

Pick Areas
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse is 5555Z. The batteries are tracked individually, instead of with the serial numbers on the pallets. Physical Location - Lower level of designated racks. Purpose - This location is for pallets of batteries that are awaiting shipment to the customer.

Doors
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse. An example is 0101Z to 0124Z. These pallets have a bar coded label that includes customer and transportation information. Physical Location - Trailers that are placed in the dock doors to be loaded. Purpose - This location is for pallets of batteries that are being loaded on the trucks.

Customer Returns
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse is 0000Z. The batteries are tracked individually, instead of with the serial numbers on the pallets. Physical Location - To be determined. Purpose - This area is for batteries that have been returned from customers.

Boost
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse is 7777Z. The batteries are tracked individually, instead of with the serial numbers on the pallets. Physical Location - Designated area of the building. There will be conveyor tables to place the batteries on to be charged Purpose - This area is for batteries that need to be charged to meet shipping requirements.

Warehouse Layout Definitions

1-5

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Boost In
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse is 8888Z. The location allows the storage of multiple serial numbers. Physical Location - Designated area of building. Purpose - This is a staging area for batteries that are going into boost.

Boost Out
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse is 7766Z. The location allows the storage of multiple serial numbers. Physical Location - Designated area of building. Purpose - This is a staging area for batteries that are going out of boost into the racks.

Fork
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse is 1111Z. Physical Location - All forklifts used to pick pre-finished product. Purpose - This is a holding area for while batteries are being picked for customers that are prefinished.

Error Location
Stock Locator coding within the warehouse is 9988W. Physical Location - None. Purpose - This is a location where serial numbers are moved to be researched.

1-6

Warehouse Layout Definitions

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Daily Balancing Shipments and Receipts to the Battery Activity Report


PO Receipts (OF)
View the daily total of the packing slips received by vendors after the batteries have been checked in and received in the system. This quantity should match the quantity in the PO Receipt column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, run the Inventory PO Receipts report, option 18 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. Verify what POs were received on the day of balancing in question by matching the packing slips to the report, and that the quantities received in the Cardex match the packing slips.

Transfer Receipts (OT, EI)


View the daily total of the packing slips received from other EXIDE locations after the batteries have been checked in and received in the system. This quantity should match the quantity in the Transfer Receipts column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, run the Transfer Receipts (Batteries) report, option 4 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. Verify what POs were received on the day of balancing in question by matching the packing slips to the report. Also verify that the quantities received in the Cardex match the packing slips.

Transfer Shipments (ST, EO)


View the daily total of the BOLs/Manifests for the transfer shipments to other EXIDE locations. This quantity should match the quantity in the Transfer Shipment column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, run the Transfer Orders Shipped report, option 3 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. Verify what transfer shipments were shipped on the day of balancing in question by matching the BOLs/Manifests for the transfer shipments to the report. Subtract any parts from the total (Handles, Acid, etc.). This should now match the B.A.R.

Transfer Returns
There are no credit returns for transfers.

Customer Shipments (SG, SZ, SX, SP)


View the daily total of the BOLs/Manifests for the Customer shipments. This quantity should match the quantity in the Customer Shipments column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, run the Items/Orders Shipped by Trip report, option 7 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. Subtract any parts from the total (Handles, Acid, etc.). This should now match the B.A.R.

Return Inv./Return Non Inv. (CR, CS, CL, CD, CP)


Compare the daily total of the actual delivery exceptions report forms for the Return Inv. & Return Non Inv. columns of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, compare the credits to the RMA Returns report, option 6 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. This report should be run daily to balance all credits processed.

Daily Balancing Shipments and Receipts to the Battery Activity Report

1-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Blem (Reason Code H)


Compare the daily total of the actual Blems, from the conversion reports, to the Blem column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, review the Conversion Blem report, option 16 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. All the Blem conversions for the systems update cycle are included in total Blem conversions. Review the H Blem code only when reconciling the inventory for this category of Blem batteries.

Blem Salvage (Reason Code P)


Compare the daily total of the actual Blems, from the conversion reports, to the Blem column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, review the Conversion Blem report, option 16 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. All the Blem conversions for the systems update cycle are included in total Blem conversions. Review the P Blem code only when reconciling the inventory for this category of Blem batteries. Note: The Blem total is the net of batteries converted for the day.

Junk (Reason Codes E&J)


Compare the daily total of the actual junks from the conversion reports to the Junk column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, review the Conversion Junk report, option 15 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. All the junk conversions for the system update cycle are included in total junk conversions. Review the E&J junk codes only when reconciling the inventory for this category of junk batteries. Note: The Junk total is the net of all batteries converted for the day.

Junk (Reason Code K


Compare the daily total of the actual junks from the conversion reports to the Junk column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, review the Conversion Junk report, option 15 on the Reconciliation Report Menu. All the junk conversions for the system update cycle are included in total junk conversions. Review the K junk codes only when reconciling the inventory for this category of junk batteries.

Customer Returns to Junk


Compare the daily totals of Junks from the Junk tickets, CI line types on Damages entered as junk (8900007), CI line types on Rotations entered as junk (8900007) & CI line types on Stocklifts entered as junk (8900007).

Customer Returns to Blem


Compare the daily total of CI line types on Damages entered as Blem (8910460), CI line types on Rotations entered as Blem (8910460) and CI line types on stocklifts entered as Blem (8910460).

1-8

Daily Balancing Shipments and Receipts to the Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Customer Returns Non Inventory


Not yet determined.

IN31/IN34
Compare the daily total of CC battery adjustments to the IN31/IN34 column of the B.A.R. If the totals do not match, review the CC Cycle Count Conversion report, option 17 on the Reconciliation Report Menu.

IN29/IN99
Compare the daily total of JW (Junk weight) conversions minus the shipments of junk weight

JDE Reports for Reconciling


Battery Activity Report Inventory PO Receipts Report Transfer Receipt (Batteries) Report Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report Transfer Orders Shipped Report RMA Returns Report Conversion (Blem) Report Conversion (Junk) Report N Conversion (Type to Type) Report CC Conversion (Cycle Count) Report

AS 400 Battery Activity Report Explanation of Column Headings


Beginning Balance-the total beginning inventory balance for each day. PO Receipt-the total purchased batteries ADDED to battery inventory each day. Transfer Receipts-the total incoming shipments from an EXIDE facility ADDED to battery inventory each day. Transfer Shipment - the total incoming shipments from an EXIDE facility SUBTRACTED from battery inventory each day. Customer Shipments-the total outgoing shipments to customers SUBTRACTED from battery inventory each day. RMA-the total return material authorizations ADDED to battery inventory each day. Net Shipments-total customer shipments minus (-) total RMAs each day. Inventory Conversion Blem (Adjustments)-the total batteries converted to Blem SUBTRACTED from inventory each day. Note: Salvaged batteries from Blem are ADDED to the Blem inventory. Inventory Conversion Junk (Adjustments)-the total battery converted to junk SUBTRACTED from inventory each day. Note: Salvaged batteries from junk are ADDED to Blem inventory. Balance-Beginning Balance + PO Receipts + IPI (transfer) Receipts - IPI (transfer) Shipment - Customer Shipments + RMA - Blem - Junk for each day. Note: Salvaged batteries (+ Blem + junk) add to the inventory balance.
1-9

Daily Balancing Shipments and Receipts to the Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Return Inventory-the total batteries from customer shortages and customer refused delivery exceptions. Return non-Inventory-the total batteries from CN (credit line that does not effect inventory) lines on customer damage, rotations, and stocklift delivery exceptions. Other IN31/IN34-the total batteries of CC (cycle count) adjustments. Other IN29/IN99-the total net of JW (junk weight) conversions minus shipments of junk weight.

Adjustment Codes
Blem Code H is used to remove batteries from inventory and ADD them to the inventory as seconds. Blem Salvage Code P is used to salvage batteries from Blems (seconds) and ADD them to the battery inventory. Junk Code E is used to remove batteries from inventory and ADD them to junk inventory, then charge them to the DC account. Junk Code J is used to remove batteries from inventory and ADD them to junk inventory, then charge them to the corporate account. Junk Salvage Code K is used to salvage batteries from junk (scrap), and ADDS them to battery inventory. Conversion Codes N is used to convert batteries from one item to another item. These battery conversions are charged to the DC account. Other Conversion WR (Receipt of Warranty Batteries) is used for the receipt of warranty batteries to WIP 8900017. Other Conversion WF (WIP From) is used to convert from warranty WIP batteries to Junk (8900007), Recon (8910021), New Basic or New Finished batteries. Other Conversion BF (Blem From) is used to convert from Blem (8910460) to a Junk (8900007), New Basic or New Finished battery. Other Conversion JF (Junk From) is used to convert from Junk (all types) to a Recon (8910021) battery. Other Conversion JW is used to convert from Junk eaches (all types) to Junk LBS (#10201). Other Conversion CC (Cycle Count) is used to correct inventory when performing cycle counts.

1-10

Daily Balancing Shipments and Receipts to the Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

PARC Process
BAF
1. Total up incoming batteries received on a daily basis. 2. Do an inventory adjustment to add part number 8900017 (BAF WIP-work in process) to

inventory. You will use the reason code WR (WIP Receipt) for this transaction. When checking the Item Ledger Cardex, this transaction will appear as a DK doc type.
3. Analyze product and determine disposition. 4. Convert from part number 8900017 to the following part numbers based on product

disposition. You will use the reason code WF (WIP FROM) for this transaction. When checking the Item Ledger Cardex, this transaction will appear as a DR doc type. From 8900017 (BAF WIP) 8900017 (BAF WIP) 8900017 (BAF WIP) 8900017 (BAF WIP) G/L Class IN24 IN24 IN24 IN24 To 8900007 (Junk 6 & 12 Volt) 8910021 (Recond 12) New Basic Batteries New Finished Batteries G/L Class IN99 IN24 IN31 IN34

Stocklife/Rotation Processing
1. Enter all delivery exceptions for finished batteries received daily as a line type of CN on

an order type of either CP or CL. On the order just entered, key the last line for the total qty as a Blem 8910460 with a line type of CI.
2. Analyze product and determine disposition. 3. Convert from part number 8910460 to the following part numbers based on product

disposition. You will use the reason code BF (BLEM FROM) for this transaction. When checking the Item Ledger Cardex, this transaction will appear as a DR doc type. From 8910460 (BLEM 900) 8910460 (BLEM 900) 8910460 (BLEM 900) G/L Class IN29 IN29 IN29 To 8900007 (Junk 6 & 12 Volt) New Basic Batteries New Finished Batteries G/L Class IN99 IN31 IN34

PARC Process

1-11

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Junk
1. Enter all Junks daily as CJ Doc type based on junk receipt ticket. 2. Analyze product and determine if any Junks are recoverable. 3. If recoverable, convert from the following numbers to the following part numbers based on

product disposition. You will use the reason code JF (JUNK FROM) for this transaction. When checking the Item Ledger Cardex, this transaction will appear as a DR doc type. From 8900007 (Junk 6 & 12 Volt) 8900008 (Junk Hvy Duty) 8900009 (Junk Dual Terminal) 8900010 (Junk 4D & 8D) 8900011 (Junk Gdn Tractor) 8900012 (Junk Motorcycle) 8900013 (WW Bucket) 8900014 (Junk Forklift) 8900016 (WW Barrel) G/L Class IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 To 8910021 (Recond 12) 8910021 (Recond 12) 8910021 (Recond 12) 8910021 (Recond 12) 8910021 (Recond 12) 8910021 (Recond 12) Not recoverable no conversion required 8910021 (Recond 12) Not recoverable no conversion required G/L Class IN24 IN24 IN24 IN24 IN24 IN24 IN24

Junk Conversions
1. Junk conversions will be done just prior to smelter shipment. 2. Convert from eaches to pounds on junk shipments to smelter. You will use the reason code

JW (JUNK WEIGHT) for this transaction. When checking the Item Ledger Cardex, this transaction will appear as a DR doc type. From 8900007 (Junk 6 & 12 Volt) 8900008 (Junk Hvy Duty) 8900009 (Junk Dual Terminal) 8900010 (Junk 4D & 8D) 8900011 (Junk Gdn Tractor) 8900012 (Junk Motorcycle) 8900014 (Junk Forklift) 8900013 (WW Bucket) 8900016 (WW Barrel) Note: G/L Class IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 To 10201 (Scrap Junks Wet) 10201 (Scrap Junks Wet) 10201 (Scrap Junks Wet) 10201 (Scrap Junks Wet) 10201 (Scrap Junks Wet) 10201 (Scrap Junks Wet) 10201 (Scrap Junks Wet) 10404 (Wheel Weights) 10404 (Wheel Weights) G/L Class IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99 IN99

When looking up 10201 in the Item Ledger Cardex you will have to key #10201 or SCRAP JUNKS WET on the item line. When looking up 10201 in the Locator you will have to key 10201 for the item # in the Value column and change the 3rd item # MFAITM in the Field column to MFLITM.

1-12

PARC Process

Exide Technologies, Inc.

IBC Junk Battery Pickups


1. Enter all IBC Junk battery pick ups by weight using item number 10207. First look up the

existing weight for item number 10207 in the Item Ledger Cardex. Then take that weight plus the new weight coming in to use for the adjustment. You will use the reason code CC for this adjustment transaction, keying in the total combined weight.
2. Then ship the item number 10207 by weight on the appropriate doc type for the smelter load.

Shipments
From PARC PARC Shipments PARC PARC PARC PARC PARC To Orders to Exide Non-JDE Smelters Smelters JDE DC Customer Customer Employee Casual Doc Type EO SI ST SG SZ SX SX G/L Class IN99 IN99 IN24, 29, 31, 34 IN24, 29, 31, 34 IN24, 29, 31, 34 IN24, 29, 31, 34 IN24, 29, 31, 34

Credits
From Customer Customer Customer To PARC PARC PARC Rtrn Rsn Junks Stocklifts Rotations Doc Type CJ CL CP G/L IN99 IN34 IN34 LT CI CN CN G/L IN29 IN29 LT CI CI

Transfer Receipts
From JDE To PARC Doc Type OT G/L Class IN29, 99

PARC Process

1-13

Exide Technologies, Inc.

1-14

PARC Process

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Sales Order Entry Module


How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG
Introduction
While the majority of customer sales orders are placed at Exides corporate headquarters, you may need to process a last minute customer order at the distribution center.

Procedure
To enter a customer order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

2-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Office Team Menu screen appears.

2-2

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

2-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Orders Menu, on the command line and press Enter. The

Customer Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.

7. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Order, on the command line and press Enter. The

Customer Sales Orders SG screen appears.

2-4

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter the ship to number:

IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown,

THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 11. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

9. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


10. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (Option)

field.
11. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 12. Tab to the Requested field, and enter the customers requested delivery date.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

2-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Tab to the Customer PO field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers

purchase order number: IF the customer is Not Toyota USA or Mercedes, Dept. 592, Toyota USA, Mercedes, Dept. 592, Note: THEN enter the Customers purchase order number in the Reference field. Dock code, manifest, and card number without any separators. Release number.

Any alpha characters contained in the purchase order number must be uppercase.

14. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter an alternate customer

number, if necessary: IF the customer sales order is Not EDI manually entered, EDI manually entered and pertains to Volvo and Mack, THEN enter An alternate customer number of Future III shipper number, if applicable. The Ordno for Volvo, or the Req. # for Mack, not the PO#.

2-6

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Tab to the Item field, and enter the appropriate item number preceded by a decimal.

16. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the required number of batteries. 17. Tab to the O (Options) field, and if the customer is Original Equipment (OE) Mercedes,

then perform the following steps: a. Enter 2. b. Press Enter, and the Associated Text window appears. c. Enter each ran# on a separate line. d. Press Enter. e. Press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

2-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 18. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

19. Press N in the prompt to NOT accept the order, then press Enter.

2-8

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc. 20. Press F15, and the Order Heading Information screen appears.

21. Tab to the Ordered By field, and enter the customer name. 22. Press Enter twice, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears. 23. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. You have now entered a

customer sales order.


24. Continue to enter orders or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

2-9

Exide Technologies, Inc.

2-10

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non JDE (EO)


Introduction
Currently the Exide locations are in the process of being converted to JD Edwards systems. Shipments to non-JDE Exide locations are to be done on EO document types.

Procedure
To enter a complimentary sale, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Orders to Exide Non JDE EO, on the command line.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non JDE (EO)

2-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Orders to Exide Non JDE EO screen appears.

6. Tab to the Ship To field, and press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

2-12

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non JDE (EO)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Type Exide and the non-JDE location name in the Alpha Name field.

Note:

For the purpose of this example, we typed Exide Reading.

8. Tab to the Search Type field, and type an L. 9. Press Enter, and a list of non-JDE location name(s) appears.

10. Tab to the desired location, and type 4 (Select) in the O (Option) field.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non JDE (EO)

2-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number.

12. Tab to the Requested field, and enter the date of the requested delivery. 13. Press Enter to accept the data.

2-14

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non JDE (EO)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Press Enter. The Sales Order Entry screen appears.

15. Tab to Item field, and enter the battery type, finished battery number (90#), or part number. 16. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the required number of batteries. 17. Press Enter. The message Enter Y to Record Order appears.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non JDE (EO)

2-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 18. Enter Y to accept the order, and then press Enter. 19. Continue to enter orders or press F3 to exit.

2-16

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non JDE (EO)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Complimentary Sales SP


Introduction
A complimentary sale is the purchase of a product by someone in the sales department.

Procedure
To enter a complimentary sale, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Complimentary Sales SP, on the command line.

How to Enter a Complimentary Sales SP

2-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. A reminder message appears identifying the tasks to complete.

6. Press F6. The Complimentary Sales SP screen appears.

2-18

How to Enter a Complimentary Sales SP

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the Sold To field and type the address number of the Atlanta office, 2012. 8. Tab to the Ship To field, and enter the customer number from the address book, or type 2012

for a customer not in the address book.


9. Tab to the Requested field, and enter the customers requested delivery date. 10. Tab to the Customer PO field, and enter the G/L account number to be charged for the

complimentary order.
11. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter an alternate customer

number, if necessary: IF the customer sales order is Not EDI manually entered, EDI manually entered and pertains to Volvo and Mack, THEN enter An alternate customer number of Future III shipper number, if applicable. The Ordno for Volvo, or the Req. # for Mack, not the PO#.

12. Tab to the Item field, and enter the appropriate item number preceded by a decimal. 13. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the required number of batteries. 14. Tab to the Unit Price field, and type 0.00. 15. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

16. Enter N in the prompt to NOT accept the order, then press Enter.

How to Enter a Complimentary Sales SP

2-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Press F15, and the Order Heading Information screen appears.

18. Tab to the Ordered By field, and enter the salesmans name. Press Enter to accept the order. 19. Press F17 to enter a ship to address that does not exist in the address book. The Order

Address Information screen appears.


20. Press F8 to toggle between the Sold To and Ship To address information screens.

21. Type the ship to address in the address fields and press Enter. 22. Press F3 twice, and then press Enter. The Complimentary Sales screen appears displaying

the Enter Y to Record Order prompt.


23. Type Y at the prompt to accept the order, and then press Enter. 2-20 How to Enter a Complimentary Sales SP

Exide Technologies, Inc. 24. Continue to enter complimentary sales or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter a Complimentary Sales SP

2-21

Exide Technologies, Inc.

2-22

How to Enter a Complimentary Sales SP

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Transfer Order to JDE DC ST/OT


Introduction
A transfer is an interplant inventory transfer of stock between Exide facilities. The transfer order is entered either as a finished battery order or a basic battery order. In some instances, the unit price of the transfer order may need to be entered due to a promotion. This is a transfer from one JD Edwards location to another JD Edwards location.

Procedure
To enter a transfer order to JDE DC ST/OT, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT, on the command line.

How to Enter a Transfer Order to JDE DC ST/OT

2-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT screen appears.

2-24

How to Enter a Transfer Order to JDE DC ST/OT

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Perform the following steps:

IF you want to Make a change,

THEN 1. Enter I in the Action Code field. 2. Enter the order number in the S/O No field. 3. Press Enter. 4. Make the necessary changes. 5. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

Delete a line,

1. Enter I in the Action Code field. 2. Enter the order number in the S/O No field. 3. Press Enter. 4. Enter a 9 in the O (Option) column by the order to be deleted. 5. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

Add a transfer order,

1. Tab to the Ship Frm Brn field, and enter the branch/plant shipping the order. 2. Tab to the Ship To Brn field, and enter the branch/plant receiving the order. 3. Tab to the Item Number field, and enter the item(s) being transferred. 4. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of batteries being transferred. 5. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

How to Enter a Transfer Order to JDE DC ST/OT

2-25

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, and then press Enter. 8. Continue to enter transfer orders or press F3 to exit.

2-26

How to Enter a Transfer Order to JDE DC ST/OT

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter an Order for Test Batteries TS


Introduction
Occasionally, batteries are requested to be sent to Atlanta for testing purposes.

Procedure
To enter an order to test batteries, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 9, Test Batteries on the command line.

How to Enter an Order for Test Batteries TS

2-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Test Batteries TS screen appears.

6. Tab to the Sold To field and type the address number of the Atlanta office, 2012. 7. Tab to the Ship To field and type 2012. 8. Tab to the Requested field, and enter the date of the test request.

2-28

How to Enter an Order for Test Batteries TS

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Customer PO field, and enter the G/L account number to be charged.

10. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter an alternate customer

number, if necessary: IF the customer sales order is Not EDI manually entered, EDI manually entered and pertains to Volvo and Mack, THEN enter An alternate customer number of Future III shipper number, if applicable. The Ordno for Volvo, or the Req. # for Mack, not the PO#.

11. Tab to Item field, and enter the appropriate item number preceded by a decimal. 12. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the required number of batteries. 13. Tab to the Unit Price field, and type in 0.00.

How to Enter an Order for Test Batteries TS

2-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

15. Enter N in the prompt to NOT accept the order, then press Enter. 16. Press F15, and the Order Heading Information screen appears.

2-30

How to Enter an Order for Test Batteries TS

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Tab to the Ordered By field, and enter the name of the person requesting the battery test. 18. Press Enter twice, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears. 19. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. You have now entered an order

to test for batteries.


20. Continue to enter orders or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter an Order for Test Batteries TS

2-31

Exide Technologies, Inc.

2-32

How to Enter an Order for Test Batteries TS

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Assign a Pick Number


Introduction
After entering an order, you must then assign a pick number.

Procedure
To assign a pick number, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Assign Pick Number on the command line.

How to Assign a Pick Number

2-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Assign Pick Number screen appears.

6. Tab to the Order Number row, and enter the appropriate value from the following table in

the Value column: TO assign a pick number to A single order, THEN type *VALUE in the Value column. Press Enter twice, and the Values for: Order Number screen appears. Enter the order number(s) to be assigned a pick number. *ALL in the Value column. Press Enter. The Values for: Order Type screen appears.

All orders,

2-34

How to Assign a Pick Number

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter, and the message Assign Pick Number submitted to batch appears.

8. Continue assigning pick numbers or press F12 to exit.

How to Assign a Pick Number

2-35

Exide Technologies, Inc.

2-36

How to Assign a Pick Number

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Assign Pick Numbers for Backorders


Introduction
For various reasons, a customers order may need to be placed on backorder. The customer is set up and allows for items to be backordered. As soon as the product is available, the orders will be released from a backorder status to begin processing. Backorders released in batch will release all backorders for all customers.

Procedure
To assign pick numbers for backorders, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Assign Pick Numbers for B/Os on the command line.

How to Assign Pick Numbers for Backorders

2-37

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Assign Pick Number for B/Os screen appears.

6. Tab to the Order Number row, and enter the appropriate value from the chart below in the

Value column. TO release A single backorder, THEN type *VALUE in the Value column. Press Enter twice, and the Values for: Order Number screen appears. Enter the order number(s) to be assigned a pick number. *ALL in the Value column. Press Enter.

All backorders,

2-38

How to Assign Pick Numbers for Backorders

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The message Assign Pick Number for B/Os submitted to batch appears. You

have now assigned a pick number for backorders.

8. Press F6 to continue assigning pick numbers for backorders.

How to Assign Pick Numbers for Backorders

2-39

Exide Technologies, Inc.

2-40

How to Assign Pick Numbers for Backorders

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Create a Backorder in Advance (Split Loads)


Introduction
In the event that the quantity of items requested cannot be shipped in one shipment, a backorder will need to be created so that some or all of the items are not cancelled.

Procedure
To create a backorder in advance (split loads), perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Create Back Orders on the command line.

How to Create a Backorder in Advance (Split Loads)

2-41

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Create Back Orders screen appears.

6. Enter the order number for the shipment to be backordered in the Order# field. 7. Press Enter.

2-42

How to Create a Backorder in Advance (Split Loads)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the Sel (Select) field of the order that you would like to backorder. Type 1 and press

Enter. All lines of the order now appear on the screen.

How to Create a Backorder in Advance (Split Loads)

2-43

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Qty Backorder field for the item to be backordered. Enter the number of items to

be backordered, and then press F6 to update the order. The Create Back Orders screen reappears.

10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 if you want to backorder further items in the order.

Note:

If you continue to backorder additional items, the Qty to Pick and Total to Pick fields update to reflect the current number of items.

11. Press F3 to exit.

2-44

How to Create a Backorder in Advance (Split Loads)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Release a Backorder Batch


Introduction
For various reasons, a customers order may need to be placed on backorder. The customer is set up and allows for items to be backordered. As soon as the product is available, the orders will be released from a backorder status to begin processing. Backorders released in batch will release all backorders for all customers.

Procedure
To release a backorder batch, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 15, Release Backorders - Batch on the command line.

How to Release a Backorder Batch

2-45

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Release Backorders - Batch screen appears.

6. Tab to the Order Number row, and enter the appropriate value from the table below in the

Value column. TO release A single backorder, THEN type *VALUE in the Value column. Press Enter twice, and then enter the order number(s) to be assigned a pick number. *ALL in the Value column. Press Enter.

All backorders,

2-46

How to Release a Backorder Batch

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The message Release Backorders - Batch submitted to batch appears. You

have now released a backorder batch.

8. Type 33 on the command line.

How to Release a Backorder Batch

2-47

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter, and the Work with Submitted Jobs screen appears.

10. Verify that the job has a status of OUTQ.

Note:

The next logical step is to assign a pick number for backorders (Option 6 on the DC Sales Order Entry menu screen.

11. Press F3 to exit.

2-48

How to Release a Backorder Batch

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Temporarily Change a Ship To


Introduction A customer may need to have a particular order shipped to an address that is different from the default address associated with the ship to address number. The address change will not change any Address Book information or change the ship to address for any other orders. Procedure
To temporarily change a ship to address, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Order Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Customer Sales Order Menu appears.


5. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Orders on the command line. Press Enter and the

Customer Sales Order SG screen appears.

6. Tab to the Ship To field, and enter the customer ship to number. 7. Tab to the Customer PO field, and enter the customer purchase order number.

How to Temporarily Change a Ship To

2-49

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter an alternate customer

number, if necessary: IF the customer sales order is Not EDI manually entered, EDI manually entered and pertains to Volvo and Mack, THEN enter An alternate customer number of Future III shipper number, if applicable. The Ordno for Volvo, or the Req. # for Mack, not the PO#.

9. Tab to the Item field, and enter the item number to be shipped. 10. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of items to be shipped. 11. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

12. Type N in the prompt to NOT accept the order, and then press Enter.

2-50

How to Temporarily Change a Ship To

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Press F15 to enter a ship to address that does not exist in the address book. The Order

Heading Information screen appears.

14. Press F17 to display the Order Address Information screen.

How to Temporarily Change a Ship To

2-51

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press F8 to toggle between the Sold To and Ship To address information screens.

16. Type the ship to address in the address fields and press Enter. You have now temporarily

changed a ship to address.


17. Press F3 to exit.

2-52

How to Temporarily Change a Ship To

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Add to an Existing Order


Introduction
A customer will often notify Exide that an addition needs to be made to the existing order. The status must be validated before any changes can be made to the order. A line cannot be added by Sales Order Processing if the status of order is beyond 520. It can only be added at the distribution center.

Status Codes
The following table contains a list of status codes and their associated descriptions: Status Code 520 540 545 560 580 904 999 Enter Sales Order Print Pick Slips (Assign to Trip) Packing Confirmation (Pick the Order) Shipment Confirmation (Pack the Order) Print Invoices (Order Has Been Ship Verified) B/O In Ship Confirm (Line Backordered) Complete-Ready to Purge (Invoiced) Description

Procedure
To add to an existing order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Order Menu on the command line, then press Enter. The

Customer Sales Order Menu screen appears.

How to Add to an Existing Order

2-53

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Orders SG on the command line, then press Enter. The

Customer Sales Orders SG screen appears.

6. Type I in the Action Code field to inquire about a specific order. 7. Tab to one of the following fields and enter the appropriate information to view the order to

be modified: Field Order Number Ship To Description Enter the customers order number. Enter the customers store number. Press F1 to view a name search for the correct customer and store location Enter the customers purchase order number or Future III shipper number, if no PO number. For Toyota USA, enter the dock code, manifest and card number without any separators. For Mercedes, Dept. 592, enter the release number. Enter an alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. For EDI manually entered orders pertaining to Volvo and Mack. The number for Mack is the Req.# and for Volvo, the Ordno, not the PO#.

Reference

Customer#

2-54

How to Add to an Existing Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Customer Sales Orders SG screen appears with the customers order.

9. Tab to the Item field directly below the populated Item field, and enter the item to be added. 10. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of batteries to be added.

How to Add to an Existing Order

2-55

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

12. Enter Y at the prompt to accept the change, then press Enter. 13. Continue to enter order additions or press F3 to exit.

2-56

How to Add to an Existing Order

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Cancel Lines on an Existing Order


Introduction
A customer will often notify Exide that a cancellation or change needs to be made to the existing order. The status must be validated before any changes can be made to the order.

Procedure
To cancel or change lines on an existing order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Order Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Customer Sales Order Menu appears.


5. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Orders SG on the command line, then press Enter. The

Customer Sales Orders SG screen appears.

6. Type I in the Action Code field to inquire about a specific order. 7. Tab to one of the following fields and enter the appropriate information to view the order to

be modified:

How to Cancel Lines on an Existing Order

2-57

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Field Order Number Ship To

Description Enter the customers order number. Enter the customers store number. Press F1 to view a name search for the correct customer and store location Enter the customers purchase order number or Future III shipper number, if no PO number. For Toyota USA, enter the dock code, manifest and card number without any separators. For Mercedes, Dept. 592, enter the release number. Enter an alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. For EDI manually entered orders pertaining to Volvo and Mack. The number for Mack is the Req.# and for Volvo, the Ordno, not the PO#.

Reference

Customer#

2-58

How to Cancel Lines on an Existing Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Customer Sales Orders SG screen appears with the customers order.

9. Tab to the row of the line to be cancelled, and type 9 in the O column.

How to Cancel Lines on an Existing Order

2-59

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter to cancel the line.

Note:

The quantity is now highlighted to indicate that the line has been cancelled.

11. Tab to the Quantity field to change an existing line. Enter the desired modifications and

press Enter.
12. To change an existing line type, cancel the existing line by performing Steps 9 and 10. To

add the new line, see How to Add to an Existing Order.


13. Enter Y at the prompt to accept the change, and then press Enter. 14. Continue to enter changes or press F3 to exit.

2-60

How to Cancel Lines on an Existing Order

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Truck Routing Module


How to Route Using Truck Stops
Downloading Orders
To download orders from the JD Edwards PC, perform the following steps:
1. Double-click the File Build/Download icon. You will be prompted for the number of days

out.
2. Select the number of days out based on the orders due dates. This number will usually be

between ten and twelve days. Note: This allows the PC to log on to JD Edwards and select all orders on the system within the date selected, as long as they have been assigned pick numbers and have not already been assigned to a trip. This process allows the PC to download the orders, after which the file DOWNLOAD.PIK will be created in the C:\TSDATA directory.

3. Copy C:\TSDATA\DOWNLOAD.PIK from the JD Edwards PC to a floppy disk. 4. Copy DOWNLOAD.PIK from the floppy disk to the C:\TSDATA directory of the Truck

Stops Application computer.

Routing
To route orders, perform the following steps:
1. Route the orders downloaded from JD Edwards using the Truck Stops software. 2. Save the routes in the directory C:\TSDATA\UPLOAD.PRN on the Truck Stops

Application computer.
3. Copy C:\TSDATA\UPLOAD.PRN from the Truck Stops Application computer to a floppy

disk.
4. Copy the UPLOAD.PRN file to the C:\TSDATA directory of the JD Edwards PC.

Uploading Orders
To upload orders from the JD Edwards PC, perform the following step: Double-click the Upload Route File icon. The upload first inputs the routes into JD Edwards. It then assigns each route a trip number and assigns each order on the route to a trip. Once all the routes have been uploaded, the TRUCK STOPS TRIP BUILD report automatically prints on the JD Edwards printer.

Truck Stops Trip Build Report


This report displays the trips created by the upload. You must view the report for any orders which have not been automatically assigned to a trip. Once all orders have been assigned to a trip, the pick tickets can be printed.

How to Route Using Truck Stops

3-1

Exide Technologies, Inc.

3-2

How to Route Using Truck Stops

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Manually Route an Order


Introduction
An order may need to be manually routed when assigning it to a trip.

Procedure
To manually route an order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line.

How to Manually Route an Order

3-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Press Enter. The Operations Team Menu screen appears.

4. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line.

3-4

How to Manually Route an Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The DC Routing Menu screen appears.

6. Enter option 2, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line.

How to Manually Route an Order

3-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The Trip Assignment - Trip Build screen appears.

8. Press F6 to assign a new trip number. The Trip Number field displays a trip number

generated by the system.

3-6

How to Manually Route an Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Trp Seq field and enter the sequence for the trip. 10. Tab to the Pick Number field and enter the pick number.

11. Press Enter to display the pick information. 12. If you know the carrier, trailer, or door information press F8 to display the Trip Master

Maintenance screen.

How to Manually Route an Order

3-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Tab to the Carrier Nbr field. The default entry is the Exide carrier. Press F1 to select a

third-party carrier.
14. Tab to the Description field and enter a brief description for the trip, if desired. 15. Tab to the Trailer Number and enter the trailer number on which the batteries will be

loaded.
16. Tab to the Door Nbr field and enter the door number from which the trip will be loaded.

17. Tab to the Seal Number field and enter the seal number on the truck, if applicable. 18. Tab to the Driver Name field and enter the name of the truck driver, if desired.

3-8

How to Manually Route an Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 19. Tab to the Scheduled Departure field and enter the date the shipment will leave the

distribution center.

20. Press Enter to redisplay the Trip Assignment - Trip Build screen. Once the cursor

reappears in the Trip Nbr field, the information has been accepted.
21. Press F3 to exit.

How to Manually Route an Order

3-9

Exide Technologies, Inc.

3-10

How to Manually Route an Order

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip (Route)


Introduction
Occasionally after a trip has been created, a new pick number may need to be added.

Procedure
To manually add a pick number to an existing trip (route), perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip Assignment - Trip Build menu screen appears.

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip (Route)

3-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate trip number in the Trip Number field, and press Enter. The trip

appears on the screen.

6. Tab to the next available field in the Trp Seq column and enter the sequence number for the

pick to be added.
7. Tab to the Pick Number column and enter the pick number to be added to the trip.

3-12

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip (Route)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter to accept the pick.

9. Continue to add new pick numbers to the trip or press F3 to exit.

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip (Route)

3-13

Exide Technologies, Inc.

3-14

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip (Route)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Manually Remove a Pick from a Trip


Introduction
A routed order may need to be manually removed from a trip.

Procedure
To manually remove a pick from a trip (route), perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip Assignment - Trip Build menu screen appears.


5. Enter the appropriate trip number in the Trip Number field, and then press Enter. The trip

appears on the screen.

6. Enter a 9 in the OP column by the sequence to be removed, and then press Enter. The

sequence is removed from the trip.


7. Remove additional routed orders or press F3 to exit.

How to Manually Remove a Pick from a Trip

3-15

Exide Technologies, Inc.

3-16

How to Manually Remove a Pick from a Trip

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip


Introduction
Orders on a trip may need to be manually re-sequenced on a truck prior to shipment.

Procedure
To manually re-sequence orders on a trip, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menus menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip Assignment - Trip Build screen appears.


5. Enter the appropriate trip number in the Trip Number field, then press Enter. The trip

appears.

How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip

3-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to Trp Seq column for the first pick number to re-sequence. Enter the new sequence

number.
7. Continue to manually re-sequence the orders on a trip. When finished, press Enter to accept

the changes.

8. Press F3 to quit.

3-18

How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Trip Master Inquiry screen allows you to assign carriers, designated doors, and other data to trips leaving a distribution center.

Procedure
To use the Trip Master Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Trip Master Inquiry, on the command line.

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

3-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Trip Master Inquiry screen appears.

6. Perform one of the following steps:

IF the trip number You want to edit or display appears on the screen, You want to edit or display is not displayed on the screen,

THEN Skip to Step 7. Enter the desired trip number in the Position To field and press Enter. The Trip Master Inquiry screen appears with the selected trip number at the top of the list.

3-20

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the appropriate OP field (option), and perform one of the following steps:

IF you want to Display trip data,

THEN Type 5. Press Enter. The Trip Master Maintenance screen appears displaying the trip data. Skip to Step 10. Type 2. Press Enter. The Trip Master Maintenance screen appears displaying the trip data.

Edit trip data,

8. Change or add information as needed.

Note:

Not all fields can be changed.

9. Press Enter. The changes are saved. 10. Press F3 to return to the Trip Master Inquiry screen. 11. Select another trip number for display or editing, or press F3 to return to the DC Routing

Menu screen.

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

3-21

Exide Technologies, Inc.

3-22

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment Trip Build Screen
Introduction
The Trip Assignment Trip Build screen enables you to inquire on information about trips and print pick tickets to give to the floor for order fulfillment. If non-prefinished customers exist on the trip, a trip run date must be assigned prior to printing the pick tickets.

Procedure
To print pick tickets from the Trip Assignment - Trip Build screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip Assignment - Trip Build menu screen appears.


5. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field, then press Enter. The trip information

appears.

How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment Trip Build Screen

3-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press F5 to print all the pick tickets associated with the trip.

Note:

To print a specific pick ticket, tab to the OP field next to the pick number to be printed and type 1. Then press F5 to print the pick ticket.

7. Press F3 to exit.

3-24

How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment Trip Build Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen


Introduction
An order may need to be manually routed when assigning it to a trip. The Trip Master Maintenance screen allows you to select a carrier and designate a door, among other functions, for trips leaving a distribution center.

Procedure
To use the Trip Master Maintenance screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Trip Master Maintenance, on the command line.

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen

3-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Trip Master Maintenance screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Nbr field, then press Enter. The trip information appears.

3-26

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter information in the appropriate fields to prepare the trip. The following fields are

required: Field Carrier Nbr Door Nbr Scheduled Departure Note: Description Defaults to the Exide carrier but can be changed to a thirdparty carrier by pressing F1. Must be entered prior to truck loading. Can be utilized to keep track of trips shipping on schedule.

The other fields are not required, although they may help you better track the trip.

8. Press Enter to accept the date. 9. Enter additional trips or press F3 to exit.

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen

3-27

Exide Technologies, Inc.

3-28

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Planning Module
How to Enter Pre-Finished Production Scheduling
Introduction
Perform pre-finished (PF) production scheduling to replenish inventory for pre-finished customers. This function allows you to enter new scheduling data as well as change existing scheduling data.

Procedure
To enter PF production scheduling, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Enter Pre-Finished Production Scheduling

4-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Operations Team Menu screen appears.

4-2

How to Enter Pre-Finished Production Scheduling

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 4, Planning Menus, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.

How to Enter Pre-Finished Production Scheduling

4-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, PF Production Scheduling, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The PF Production Scheduling screen appears.

4-4

How to Enter Pre-Finished Production Scheduling

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Use the first row of fields as position to criteria to display production scheduling data.

Once the desired data displays, add or change data as necessary. Note: Depending on the status of the product in the production process, some fields might not be available for changes. IF you want to display Production data for a specific date, Production data for a specific shift or line, Production data for a specific customer department, THEN place the cursor in the Run Date field, and enter the production date. Shift field, and enter the shift number. Dept field, and enter the customer department number.

Perform the following steps, if necessary:

9. Press Enter. The PF Production Scheduling screen reappears with the data selected.

10. Tab to the OP field, and enter 9 to delete a line from the production schedule. 11. Tab to the Dep # field, and enter the customers department number. 12. Tab to the Customer Type field, and enter the customers battery type number. 13. Tab to the Shift/Line field, and enter a shift or line on which the batteries are produced. 14. Tab to the Run Seq field, and enter the order in which the batteries are produced. 15. Tab to the Run Date field, and enter a production date for the batteries. 16. Tab to the Scheduled Quantity field, and enter the number of batteries to produce. How to Enter Pre-Finished Production Scheduling 4-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Press Enter to save the data. 18. Press F3 to exit the screen.

4-6

How to Enter Pre-Finished Production Scheduling

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Change a Trip Run Date


Introduction
Once an order is entered on a trip, specify the trip process date. This also establishes the effective dates for the items that print on pick tickets.

Procedure
To change a trip run date, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Change Trip Run Date, on the command line.

How to Change a Trip Run Date

4-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Change Trip Run Date screen appears.

6. Enter the desired trip number in the Position To field, if known. 7. Press Enter, and the Change Trip Run Date screen displays the scheduling data for the trip

number entered.
8. Tab to the Trip Run Date field, and change the existing date or enter a new date. 9. Press Enter to save your data. 10. Press F3 to exit the screen.

4-8

How to Change a Trip Run Date

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter Pick Production Scheduling


Introduction
This function allows you to schedule routes without a trip number.

Procedure
To perform pick production scheduling, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Pick Production Schedule, on the command line.

How to Enter Pick Production Scheduling

4-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Pick Production Scheduling screen appears.

6. Enter the date the items are to be produced in the Run Date field. 7. Tab to the Shift field, and enter the number for the shift in which the batteries are produced. 8. Tab to the Run Sequence field, and enter the order that the batteries are to be produced. 9. Tab to the Pick Number field, and enter the pick number for the order. 10. Tab to the Shft/Line field, and enter the shift or line that produces the batteries. 11. Tab to the Run Seq field, and enter the order in which the batteries are to be produced.

4-10

How to Enter Pick Production Scheduling

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Tab to the Run Date field, and enter the date the batteries are to be produced.

13. Press Enter. The data is saved. 14. Press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Pick Production Scheduling

4-11

Exide Technologies, Inc.

4-12

How to Enter Pick Production Scheduling

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Inquire on PF Production Scheduling


Introduction
Use this function to view a listing of pre-finished (PF) production scheduling.

Procedure
To inquire on PF production scheduling, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, PF Production Scheduling, on the command line.

How to Inquire on PF Production Scheduling

4-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The PF Production Scheduling screen appears.

6. Use the first row of fields as position to criteria to display production data. Perform the

following steps, if necessary: IF you want to display Production data for a specific date, Production data for a specific shift or line, Production data for a specific customer department,
7. Press Enter. The selected data appears. 8. Press F3 to exit the screen.

THEN place the cursor in the Run Date field, and enter the production date. Shift field, and enter the shift number. Dept field, and enter the customer department number.

4-14

How to Inquire on PF Production Scheduling

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Inquire on a Pick Production Schedule


Introduction
This function allows you to schedule routes without a trip number.

Procedure
To inquire on a pick production schedule, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Pick Production Schedule, on the command line.

How to Inquire on a Pick Production Schedule

4-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Pick Production Scheduling screen appears.

6. Use the first row of fields as position to criteria to display pick production data.

Perform the following steps, if necessary: IF you want to display Production data for a specific date, Production data for a specific shift or line, Production data for a specific run sequence,
7. Press Enter. The selected data appears.

THEN place the cursor in the Run Date field, and enter the production date. Shift field, and enter the shift number. Run Sequence field, and enter the run sequence.

4-16

How to Inquire on a Pick Production Schedule

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Order Fulfillment Module


How to Process Pre-Finished Production
Introduction
Batteries must be produced to replenish pre-finished (PF) product in the racks.

Procedure
To process PF production, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Process Pre-Finished Production

5-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.

5-2

How to Process Pre-Finished Production

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Operations Menu screen appears.

How to Process Pre-Finished Production

5-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 1, Pre-Finished Production, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Prefinished Production Line Data Entry screen appears.

5-4

How to Process Pre-Finished Production

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Use the first row of fields on the screen for entering position to criteria to display

production line data. Once the desired data displays, add or change it as necessary. Note: Depending on the status of the product in the production process, some fields may not be available for changing. IF you want to display Production line data for a particular crew number, Production line data for a specific date, Production line data for a particular shift or line number, Production line data for a customers department number, data. THEN place the cursor in the Crew # field, and enter the shift number. Schedule Date field, and enter the production date. Line/Shift field, and enter the shift number. Dept # field, and enter the customers department number.

Perform the following steps, if necessary:

9. Press Enter. The Prefinished Production Line Data Entry screen appears with the selected

10. Tab to the Prod. field, and enter the number of batteries made for each line as needed. 11. Press Enter. The data is saved. 12. Press F3 to exit the screen.

How to Process Pre-Finished Production

5-5

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-6

How to Process Pre-Finished Production

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Unproduce Pre-Finished Batteries


Introduction
A battery is picked and identified as complete after it is finished. On occasion, the picker makes an error and must unproduce batteries that were considered finished.

Procedure
To unproduce pre-finished batteries, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 1, Pre-Finished Production, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Prefinished Production Line Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the crew number in the Crew # field. 6. Tab to the Schedule Date field, and enter the schedule date or accept the current date as it

appears in this field.


7. Tab to the Line/Shift field, and enter the line/shift number. 8. Tab to the Dept# field, and enter the department. 9. Press Enter. The screen displays customer data. How to Unproduce Pre-Finished Batteries 5-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-8

How to Unproduce Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press F5. The Prefinished Production Line Data Entry screen prompts you for a pallet

number.

How to Unproduce Pre-Finished Batteries

5-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter the pallet number in the Pallet Nbr field. The pallet number should be proceeded by an

S. For example, if you are using pallet number 554264, enter S554264. The screen displays pallet data such as customer type, quantity, and finished date.

5-10

How to Unproduce Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Verify the pallet data, and press F5 to unproduce. The Prefinished Production Line Data

Entry screen appears.

How to Unproduce Pre-Finished Batteries

5-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Press Enter again to verify that the pallet has been unproduced. If the pallet has been

unproduced, the screen displays the message Pallet Not Found.

14. Press F3 to exit this screen.

5-12

How to Unproduce Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries


Introduction
The pre-finished pick function allows you to perform the following tasks: Pick pre-finished batteries and place them on a pallet Temporarily delay the picking process Move batteries from one location to a picking location Close the pallet Close the pick number

Procedure
To pick pre-finished batteries, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

5-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 8, Pre-Finished Pick screen, on the command line, then press Enter. The Pre-

Finished Pick screen appears.

5. Scan or type the pick number in the Pick # field.

5-14

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6.

Press Enter. The screen prompts you for a pallet number.

7. Perform the following steps to enter a pallet to pick in the Pickup Pallet field, if necessary:

IF you are Using an existing pallet,

THEN Scan or enter the pallet number. The PreFinished Pick screen displays the pallet number and the Item# and Pick Qty. entry fields appear. Skip to Step 11. Note: You must type an S before the pallet number if it is manually entered.

Starting a new pallet,

Press Enter. The Pre-Finished Pick screen appears and prompts you for an item number and pick quantity.

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

5-15

Exide Technologies, Inc.

8. Enter or scan the number of the item to pick in the Item# field. 9. Tab to the Pick Qty. field, and scan or enter the quantity of the item to pick.

5-16

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Pre-Finished Pick screen accepts and displays the pallet number.

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

5-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Tab to the field located to the left of the 2. Close Pick option, and perform the following

steps, as necessary, to continue the picking process: IF you want to Add items to the pallet, THEN Stop placing batteries on the current pallet and print barcodes, Finish picking the order and print barcodes and the packing slip, Press Enter. Enter the item number and the quantity to pick in the Item# and Pick Qty. fields. Press Enter. Continue picking items for the pallet or select another action from the current screen. Skip to Step 24. Enter 1 (Close Pallet) and press Enter. The pallet is closed. Skip to Step 24. Enter 2 (Close Pick) and press Enter. One of the following messages will appear: All Picked F10 - Close. If you are ready to close the picking number, press F10. If you are not ready to close, press F12 to refresh. Not All PKD, F10 - Close. You have not finished picking all items for the order. If you press F10 to close the pick number, you can take one of the following actions, depending on customer preferences: Temporarily delay the picking process for the current pallet, Create a backorder for the unpicked items. Cancel the unpicked items from the order.

Skip to Step 24.

Enter 3 (Quit No Close) and press Enter. The PreFinished Pick screen displays the Pick # field. Also, a barcode prints so you can label the pallet. Enter the pick number you were working with (in the Pick # field) when you return to picking batteries for the pallet. Press Enter. The Pre-Finished Pick screen appears. Skip to Step 24. Enter 4 (Move) and press Enter. The Stock Moves Entry screen appears. Continue to Step 12. Note: You can enter data in the Item# and/or Pick Qty. fields.
How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

Move batteries from one serialized location (rack) to a picking location (type),

5-18

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

5-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Perform the following steps in the Please Choose field:

IF you want to make a Regular move, Computer-directed move,

THEN enter 2 and press Enter. Skip to Step 19. 1 and press Enter. The Stock Moves Entry screen appears with a Type field.

5-20

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Enter the customer type in the Type field, and press Enter. The Stock Moves Entry screen

appears displaying a list of locations for the customer type (item).

14. Enter an option (A through F) for the from location in the Select field.

Note:

Press F4 to page through the list of locations to select. At the end of the list, press F5 to return to the beginning of the list.

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

5-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press Enter. The Stock Moves Entry screen appears displaying the serial number, from

location, and the customer type.

16. Enter the to location in the To Loc field. The system accepts your data and redisplays the

Stock Moves Entry screen.


17. Make another stock move, or press F3 to return to the Stock Moves Entry screen. 18. Skip to Step 24.

5-22

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc. 19. Enter the customer type in the Type field, and press Enter. The Stock Moves Entry screen

appears displaying the From Location and To Location fields.

20. Enter the appropriate data in the From Location field.

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

5-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 21. Tab to the To Location field, and enter the appropriate data. The screen automatically

updates and a Serial# field appears.

5-24

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc. 22. Scan or enter an appropriate serial number to be moved. The system accepts the move data,

and redisplays the Stock Moves Entry screen.

23. Press F3 to display the Stock Moves Entry screen where you can perform another stock

move or select another option.


24. Press F3 to return to the DC Operations Menu screen.

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

5-25

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-26

How to Pick Pre-Finished Batteries

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Pick Verification


Introduction
The Pick Verification function allows you to perform several tasks: Pick verify pre-finished batteries Pick verify an order for order fulfillment Drive inventory negative with a dumb terminal when picking an order Partial-pick an order when there is not enough inventory Create a new serial number while picking an order Pack confirm an order

Procedure
To perform pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line.

How to Perform Pick Verification

5-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

5-28

How to Perform Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

7. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears.

How to Perform Pick Verification

5-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the Qty Picked field that corresponds to the appropriate GNB Type field, and enter

the quantity of batteries to pick for that type.


9. Press Enter. The quantity on hand (Qty On Hand field) decreases and the quantity picked

(Qty Picked field) increases.

10. Press F2 to close the order. A pallet tag prints. 11. Press F3 twice to exit.

5-30

How to Perform Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification


Introduction
On occasion, you might want to add batteries to a pallet using the pick verification function.

Procedure
To add to a pallet in pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line.

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

5-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field. 6. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

5-32

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1 beside the order you are adding to. 8. Press F6. The Pallet Inquiry screen appears.

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

5-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Enter 4 in the Sel field next to the pallet number that will receive the batteries. 10. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

11. Tab to the Sel field corresponding to the pick number that will receive the batteries, and enter

1.

5-34

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears.

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

5-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Tab to the Qty Picked field for the desired customer type, and enter the number of batteries

to add.

5-36

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears with the added batteries in

the Qty To Pick field. (See line 4.)

15. Press F2 to close the pallet and print a new barcode. 16. Press F3 to exit the screen.

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

5-37

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-38

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification


Introduction
Use this function to unpick batteries when an order of batteries is picked incorrectly.

Procedure
To unpick batteries in pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line.

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

5-39

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

5-40

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

5-41

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1 beside the order you want to unpick. 8. Press F6. The Pallet Inquiry screen appears.

9. Enter 4 in the Sel field next to the pallet number from which you are unpicking batteries.

5-42

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

11. Tab to the Sel field corresponding to the pick number for which you are unpicking batteries,

and enter 1.

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

5-43

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears.

13. Tab to the Qty Picked field for the desired customer type, and enter the number of batteries

to unpick. Remember to enter a minus sign (-) before the number.

5-44

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears with the unpicked quantity

of batteries subtracted from the Qty To Pick field. (See line 4.)

15. Press F2 to close the pallet and print a new barcode. 16. Press F3 to exit the screen.

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

5-45

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-46

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification


Introduction
When a user packs an order in pick verification, the pick is closed. The user can no longer unpick pallets. Also, the next status changes to 560 (Ship Confirm) and the packing slip prints.

Procedure
To pack an order in pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Pick

Verification Entry screen appears.

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

5-47

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field. 5. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

5-48

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1 beside the order to be packed. 7. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears.

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

5-49

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press F6 to pack the order. A message appears on the Pick Verification Qty Updates screen

that prompts you to press F6 again to pack confirm a complete order or, if the order is partially picked, press F15 to pack confirm.

5-50

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. At this time, perform the following step to finish packing the order:

IF All the lines of the order are picked, The order has been partially picked, Note:

THEN press F6 again to confirm pack the order. F15 to confirm pack a partial pick.

If you accidentally pressed F6 and you do not want to back order, press Enter and then press F3 to exit.

Note:

The next status of the order changes from 545 (Pick Confirm) to 560 (Shipment Confirm). The status code appears in the Next Status field.

10. Press F3 twice to exit. The Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

5-51

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-52

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification


Introduction
When a user packs an order in pick verification, the pick is closed. The user can no longer unpick pallets. Once the pick is closed, the status changes to 560, and the packing slip prints.

Procedure
To print a packing slip in pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line.

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification

5-53

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field. 6. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

5-54

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1 beside the order to be picked. 8. Press F5 to print the packing slip. The packing slip prints on the default printer. 9. Press F3 twice to exit.

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification

5-55

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-56

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification


Introduction
Use this process to reprint a pallet label using pick verification.

Procedure
To reprint pallet labels, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

5-57

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

5-58

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

7. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1 in the field that corresponds to the desired pick

number.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

5-59

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press F6. The Pallet Inquiry screen appears.

9. Enter 4 in the Sel field next to the pallet for which you are reprinting the label.

5-60

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears. The pallet number displays in the

Pallet Number field.

11. Press F2 to print the pallet label on the default printer. 12. Press F3 twice to exit.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

5-61

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-62

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label from the DC Operations Menu


Introduction
Use this function to reprint pallet labels when necessary.

Procedure
To reprint pallet labels, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label from the DC Operations Menu

5-63

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The DC Operations Menu screen appears.

5. Enter option 5, Reprint Pallet Label, on the command line.

5-64

How to Reprint a Pallet Label from the DC Operations Menu

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Print Pallet Label screen appears.

7. Enter the desired pallet number in the Pallet Number field.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label from the DC Operations Menu

5-65

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The data for the selected pallet number appears.

5-66

How to Reprint a Pallet Label from the DC Operations Menu

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter. The Print Pallet Label screen appears displaying the pallet number.

10. Press F3 to exit.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label from the DC Operations Menu

5-67

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-68

How to Reprint a Pallet Label from the DC Operations Menu

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance


Introduction
Perform a pallet adjustment when you need to move batteries from one pallet to another.

Procedure
To use picked pallet maintenance, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Picked Pallet Maintenance, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Picket Pallet Maintenance screen appears.

4. Enter the pallet number from which the batteries are being moved in the From Pallet Serial

# field.

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

5-69

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Tab to the To Pallet Serial # field, and perform the following steps as necessary:

IF you want to move batteries From an existing pallet to a new pallet, From one existing pallet to another existing pallet within the same pick,

THEN Skip to Step 10. Enter the pallet number that is receiving the batteries.

5-70

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. Pallet data appears on the Picked Pallet Maintenance screen.

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

5-71

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the quantity (of each customer type) to be moved in the appropriate Quantity field, and

press F5. The screen appears with the Press F5 to Confirm Pallet Move prompt.

5-72

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press F5 to confirm the pallet move. The quantity in the From Quantity field reflects the

change.

9. Skip to Step13.

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

5-73

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. Pallet data appears on the Picked Pallet Maintenance screen.

11. Enter the quantity (of each customer type) to be moved in the corresponding Quantity field,

and press F6. The screen appears with the Press F6 to Confirm Pallet Move.

5-74

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Press F6. The screen appears with the Last Serial Number Created message and identifies

the serial number created.

13. Press F3 to exit the Picked Pallet Maintenance screen.

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

5-75

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-76

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use Full Pallet Picking


Introduction
Full pallets of batteries must be picked to replenish pre-finished production for a customers order. Orders must be for a full pallet or a multiple of a full pallet quantity for the specific type to be picked.

Procedure
To pick full pallets of pre-finished batteries, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 9, Full Pallet Picking, on the command line.

How to Use Full Pallet Picking

5-77

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Full Pallet Pick screen appears.

5. Scan or enter the pick number in the Pick# field.

5-78

How to Use Full Pallet Picking

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Full Pallet Pick screen displays the battery types for the pick number.

7. Enter the select number in the Select field that corresponds to the battery type you want to

pick.

How to Use Full Pallet Picking

5-79

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Full Pallet Pick screen prompts you to enter a pallet number.

9. Perform the following steps in the Pallet field to enter a pallet to pick, if necessary:

IF you Know the pallet number, Do not know the pallet number,

THEN Scan or enter the pallet number. Skip to Step 11. Press F1 to display a list of pallets for the selected battery type.

5-80

How to Use Full Pallet Picking

Exide Technologies, Inc.

10. Enter the number that corresponds to the location you want to pick in the Select field. 11. Press Enter. The Full Pallet Pick screen displays pallet data.

How to Use Full Pallet Picking

5-81

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Press Enter to accept the pallet for picking. A new set of labels print for the pallet and trip

number.

5-82

How to Use Full Pallet Picking

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Scan or enter the door or rail car number in the To Loc field. The Full Pallet Pick screen

appears and displays battery types and quantities of batteries remaining.

14. Continue to pick full pallets, or press F3 to exit.

How to Use Full Pallet Picking

5-83

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5-84

How to Use Full Pallet Picking

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Truck Loading Through Confirm Shipment Module


How to Perform Truck Loading
Introduction
When loading an order onto a truck, you must document the trip number, serial number, and door number in order to truck load.

Procedure
To load a truck, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Perform Truck Loading

6-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.

6-2

How to Perform Truck Loading

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 8, Shipping on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu screen appears.

How to Perform Truck Loading

6-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 1, Truck Loading, on the command line

7. Press Enter. The Truck Loading screen appears.

6-4

How to Perform Truck Loading

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

9. Press Enter.

How to Perform Truck Loading

6-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Scan/enter the serial number on the barcode of the pallet to be loaded onto the truck or rail

car. The serial number appears in the Serial# field. Note: You must type an S before the serial number if entering it manually.

11. Scan/enter the door number through which the pallet will be loaded. The door number

appears in the Door field.

6-6

How to Perform Truck Loading

Exide Technologies, Inc.

After the door number is entered, the screen automatically updates and displays the message PALLET _____ LOADED TO TRIP.

12. Continue to load the truck or press F3 to exit.

How to Perform Truck Loading

6-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

6-8

How to Perform Truck Loading

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Un-Truck Load


Introduction
If ever you need to remove a trip from a truck, you must enter the trip number, serial number, and door number into the system.

Procedure
To un-truck a load, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 8, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.
4. Enter option 1, Truck Loading, on the command line.

How to Un-Truck Load

6-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Truck Loading screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

6-10

How to Un-Truck Load

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The trip data appears.

8. Scan/enter the serial number on the barcode of the pallet to be unloaded from the truck or rail

car. The serial number appears in the Serial# field. Note: You must type an S before the serial number if entering it manually.

How to Un-Truck Load

6-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Scan/enter the door number from which the pallet will be removed. The door number appears

in the Door field.

After the door number is entered, the screen automatically updates and displays the message PALLET _____ REMOVED FROM TRIP.

10. Continue to unload the truck or press F3 to exit. 6-12 How to Un-Truck Load

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)


Introduction
Load completing a trip is the process of printing shipping documents that consist of the Bill of Lading and Manifest for the trip.

Procedure
To load complete a trip, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 8, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.
4. Enter option 2, Load Completion, on the command line.

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

6-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Load Completion screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field, and press Enter. The trip data appears.

6-14

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press F7 to print shipping documents. The Load Completion screen displays the message

SHIPPING DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN PRINTED.

8. Continue to load complete or press F3 to exit.

How to Load Complete & Print Shipping Documents

6-15

Exide Technologies, Inc.

6-16

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)


Introduction
Trips must be ship confirmed after they have been load completed in order to relieve inventory and update the order statuses to create the invoices. Ship confirming a trip enables: Component inventory to be decreased Item Ledger to be updated On-hand and availability quantities to be changed on the summary availability Stock locator to be updated

Procedure
To confirm a trip, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 8, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.
4. Enter option 3, Confirm Shipment, on the command line.

How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)

6-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Confirm Shipment screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

6-18

How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The trip data appears.

8. Press F5 to confirm the shipment. The DC Shipping Menu screen appears. 9. Continue to confirm shipments or press F3 to exit.

How to Load Complete & Print Shipping Documents

6-19

Exide Technologies, Inc.

6-20

How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Reprint Documents


Introduction
Reprinting shipping documents enables the printing of the Bill of Lading and Manifest for the trip that has been shipped.

Procedure
To reprint shipping documents, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 8, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.
4. Enter option 4, Reprint Documents, on the command line.

How to Reprint Documents

6-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Shipping screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip# field, then press Enter. The trip selected and subsequent

trip numbers appear.

7. Enter 8 in the OP field next to the documents to be re-printed, then press Enter. The Bill of

Lading and Manifest print to the users default printer.


6-22 How to Reprint Documents

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Continue to reprint shipping documents or press F3 to exit.

How to Load Complete & Print Shipping Documents

6-23

Exide Technologies, Inc.

6-24

How to Reprint Documents

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Stock Receiving Module


How to Receive by Serial Number
Introduction
Items received into the Exide facility may be received by the serial number to reduce the orders, create proper General Ledger entries, and update on-hand inventory.

Procedure
To receive by serial number, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Receive by Serial Number

7-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.

7-2

How to Receive by Serial Number

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Operations Menu screen appears.

How to Receive by Serial Number

7-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 4, Stock Receiving, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Stock Receiving Data Entry screen appears.

7-4

How to Receive by Serial Number

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Enter option 1, Receive by Serial, on the command line.

9. Press Enter. The Stock Receiving Data Entry screen appears.

How to Receive by Serial Number

7-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Scan/enter the serial number in the Serial# field. The data for the serial number appears.

Note:

You must type an S before the serial number if entering it manually.

7-6

How to Receive by Serial Number

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter any corrections to the data, and press Enter. A message appears stating that the serial

number was received.

12. Continue to receive by serial number or press F3 to exit.

How to Receive by Serial Number

7-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7-8

How to Receive by Serial Number

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Receive by Purchase Order


Introduction
Items purchased by a purchase order must be received into the Exide facility to reduce the number of open purchase orders, create proper General Ledger entries, and update on-hand inventory.

Procedure
To receive a purchase-ordered item, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Stock Receiving, on the command line.

How to Receive by Purchase Order

7-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Stock Receiving Data Entry screen appears.

6. Enter option 2, Receive by PO, on the command line.

7-10

How to Receive by Purchase Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The Stock Receiving Data Entry screen appears.

8. Enter the purchase order number in the PO# field.

How to Receive by Purchase Order

7-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter. The Stock Receiving Data Entry screen displays the purchase order data.

7-12

How to Receive by Purchase Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Enter the quantity of items to receive in the Quantity to Receive field, then press Enter. The

suggested label sets and quantities display in the Label Sets and Qty Per fields.
11. Keep the suggested label sets, or change the sets if desired.

Note:

This screen appears only when receiving by purchase order for batteries, NOT for parts.

How to Receive by Purchase Order

7-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Press Enter to receive each item on the purchase order. The message The PO Receipts

Entered Have Been Processed appears. The number received appears in the Quantity Received column.

13. Continue to receive purchase-ordered items or press F3 to exit.

7-14

How to Receive by Purchase Order

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Reverse by Serial Number


Introduction
Items received into the Exide facility may be reversed by the serial number to reduce the orders, create proper General Ledger entries and update on-hand inventory. Batteries received at the distribution center are automatically assigned a serial number. Thus, to reverse the receipt of batteries, one must reverse by the serial number.

Procedure
To reverse by serial number, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Stock Receiving, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Receiving Data Entry screen appears.


5. Enter option 6, Reverse by Serial, on the command line.

How to Reverse by Serial Number

7-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Stock Receiving Data Entry screen appears.

7. Scan/enter the serial number to be reversed in the Serial# field.

Note:

You must type an S before the serial number if entering it manually.

7-16

How to Reverse by Serial Number

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Upon entering the serial number, the screen automatically updates and displays information from the scanned item.

8. Enter any corrections to the data, and press Enter. A message appears stating that the serial

number was reversed (unreceived).

9. Continue to reverse by serial number or press F3 to exit. How to Reverse by Serial Number 7-17

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7-18

How to Reverse by Serial Number

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Unreceive by Purchase Order


Introduction
Parts purchased by a purchase order must be received into the Exide facility to reduce the number of open purchase orders, create proper General Ledger entries, and update on-hand inventory; however, occasionally, a mistake may have been made with the receiving of the part. The purchase order receipt will need to be reversed. Note: This procedure is only for parts.

Procedure
To unreceive by purchase order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Stock Receiving, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Receiving Data Entry screen appears.


5. Enter option 2, Receive by PO, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Receiving Data Entry screen appears.

How to Unreceive by Purchase Order

7-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter the purchase order number in the PO# field, then press Enter. The Stock Receiving

Data Entry screen displays the purchase order data.

7. Enter the quantity to be reversed, as a negative number, in the Quantity to Receive column.

7-20

How to Unreceive by Purchase Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The message The PO Receipts Entered Have Been Processed appears, and the

Quantity Received field reflects the number reversed.

9. Continue to reverse by purchase order number or press F3 to exit.

How to Unreceive by Purchase Order

7-21

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7-22

How to Unreceive by Purchase Order

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use Directed Receipt


Introduction
The Directed Receipt function is used at locations where the battery types are coded as a fast mover, somewhat fast mover, slow mover, or a slower mover. When a pallet is scanned upon arrival, the system receives the pallet and suggests an empty space within the racks, dependent on how the battery type is coded.

Procedure
To reverse a purchase order for parts, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Stock Receiving, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Receiving Data Entry screen appears.

How to Use Directed Receipt

7-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 3, Directed Receipt, on the command line, then press Enter. Anew screen

appears, displaying the Serial# field.

6. Enter the serial number in the Serial# field. The screen automatically updates and displays

the battery data including a suggested location to put the pallet. Note: You must type S before the serial number if entering it manually.

7-24

How to Use Directed Receipt

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Verify the information and make any necessary changes. 8. Scan the location where the pallet will be placed. The Verify field will be populated. 9. The screen automatically updates and the message XXXXXX RECEIVED appears at the

bottom of the screen.

10. Press F3 to exit.

How to Use Directed Receipt

7-25

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7-26

How to Use Directed Receipt

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Stock Adjustments Module


How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)
Introduction
A Type-to-Type stock adjustment is the process of converting one battery type to another battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform a type-to-type adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

8-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Operations Team Menu screen appears.

8-2

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The Cycle Count Menu screen appears.

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

8-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

8-4

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Enter N in the Reason Code field.

9. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

8-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

11. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

8-6

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

14. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 15. Press Enter. 16. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

8-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

8-8

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform an Inventory to Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)


Introduction
An Inventory to Corporate Junk stock adjustment is the process of converting one battery type to a Junk battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform a corporate junk adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform an Inventory to Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

8-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter J in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-10

How to Perform an Inventory to Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting.

How to Perform an Inventory to Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

8-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

8-12

How to Perform an Inventory to Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform an Inventory to Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

8-13

Exide Technologies, Inc.

8-14

How to Perform an Inventory to Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)


Introduction
An Inventory to Corporate Junk stock adjustment is the process of converting one battery type to a Junk battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform an inventory to junk adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

8-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter E in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-16

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

8-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

8-18

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)


Introduction
A recovery from Junk stock adjustment is the process of converting from a junk battery type to another battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform a recovery from junk stock adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

8-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter K in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-20

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

8-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

8-22

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)


Introduction
An Inventory to Blem stock adjustment is the process of converting one battery type to a Blem battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform an inventory to blem adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

8-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter H in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-24

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

8-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and enter the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

8-26

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Recover from Blem Adjustment (P)


Introduction
A recovery from Blem stock adjustment is the process of converting from a Blem battery type to another battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform a recovery from a Blem adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Recover from Blem Adjustment (P)

8-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter P in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-28

How to Perform a Recover from Blem Adjustment (P)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform a Recover from Blem Adjustment (P)

8-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

8-30

How to Perform a Recover from Blem Adjustment (P)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)


Introduction
A Cycle Count (CC) stock adjustment is the process of adjusting the on hand quantity of a battery type in a location within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform a cycle count stock adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

8-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter CC in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-32

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current type in the Type field.

8. Tab to the Loc field and enter the location.

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

8-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the New Balance field and enter the number of the on hand batteries in the location.

10. Press Enter. 11. Press F3 to exit.

8-34

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)


Introduction
A receipt of Warranty Batteries stock adjustment is the process of receiving warranty batteries into a facility.

Procedure
To perform a receipt of warranty adjustments, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)

8-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter WR in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Leave the default type (8900017) in the To Type field. 8. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 8-36 How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust, then press Enter.

10. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)

8-37

Exide Technologies, Inc.

8-38

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)


Introduction
An adjustment from Warranty Batteries (WIP) stock adjustment is the process of converting WIP (work in process) batteries to another battery type in a facility.

Procedure
To perform a conversion from WIP adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

8-39

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter WF in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Leave the current type in the From Type field. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 8-40 How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

8-41

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

8-42

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)


Introduction
A Blem Batteries stock adjustment is the process of converting Blem batteries to another type in a facility.

Procedure
To perform a conversion from Blem, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

8-43

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter BF in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-44

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter 8910460 in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

8-45

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting, then

press Enter.
12. Press F3 to exit.

8-46

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)


Introduction
A conversion from junk adjustment is the process of converting a junk battery type to another battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform a conversion from junk adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

8-47

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter JF in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-48

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

8-49

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

8-50

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)


Introduction
This adjustment converts a junk battery shipment to a smelter.

Procedure
To perform a conversion of junk EAs to LBs, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

8-51

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter JW in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

8-52

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current junk each type in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

8-53

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

8-54

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Stock Moves Module


How to Perform a Computer Directed Move
Introduction
A computer directed move is the process of moving serialized batteries from one location to another location using the system to locate the batteries.

Procedure
To perform a computer directed move, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Perform a Computer Directed Move

9-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.

9-2

How to Perform a Computer Directed Move

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Operations Menu screen appears.

How to Perform a Computer Directed Move

9-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, Stock Moves, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Stock Movement Data Entry screen appears.

9-4

How to Perform a Computer Directed Move

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Enter 1, Computer Directed Move, on the command line.

9. Press Enter. A new screen appears, displaying the Type field.

How to Perform a Computer Directed Move

9-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Enter the battery type in the Type field.

11. Press Enter. A list displaying the various pallets appears.

9-6

How to Perform a Computer Directed Move

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Select the pallet to move by typing its letter in the Select field, then press Enter. The serial

number for the pallet appears.

13. Enter the appropriate location to move the pallet in the To Loc field.

If the To Location is not in use, the screen will change back to the original stock move screen.

How to Perform a Computer Directed Move

9-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

If the To Location IS in use, a message of LOC IN USE, F2=ACCPT appears. Press F2 to accept. The original stock move screen reappears.

14. Continue to perform computer-directed moves or press F3 to exit.

9-8

How to Perform a Computer Directed Move

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Rack to the Picking Area


Introduction
A regular rack to picking area move is the process of moving serialized batteries from one location to a non-serialized location by scanning.

Move variations
Within a warehouse, there are different types of serialized stock moves performed. The type of stock move is based on the location. Type Serial-to-Multiple Serial-to-Serial Serial-to-Type Multiple-to-Serial Multiple-to-Multiple Multiple-to-Type Location Pallets from a high-density location to a non-rack storage location Pallets from a high density location to another high density location Pallets from a high density location to a high density picking area Pallets from a non-rack storage location to a high-density area Pallets from a non-rack storage location to another non-rack storage location Pallets from the non-rack storage location to the picking area

Procedure
To perform a stock move from a rack to the picking area, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Stock Moves, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry menu screen appears.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Rack to the Picking Area

9-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 2, Regular Move, on the command line.

6. Press Enter. A screen appears, displaying the From Location and To Location fields.

9-10

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Rack to the Picking Area

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the appropriate data in the From Location field.

Depending on how the From Location field is set in the Default Location Maintenance, the program will work in one of three ways: 00=No restrictions or validation of pallet move from location 01=From location is invalid, but F2 accepts the move 02=Prohibits pallet moves from an invalid from location

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Rack to the Picking Area

9-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the To Location field, and enter the appropriate data. The screen automatically

updates and a Serial# field appears.

9. Scan/enter the serial number to be moved. The screen automatically refreshes, displaying the

Stock Movement Data Entry screen with the From Location and To Location fields. The move is accepted so that the batteries are no longer associated with the serial number. If entering the serial number manually, type an S before the number.
10. Continue to perform stock moves or press F3 to exit.

9-12

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Rack to the Picking Area

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Multiple Storage Location to a Rack Location
Introduction
A stock move from a multiple storage location to a rack is the process of moving serialized batteries from a multiple location (multiple serialized pallets), to a single serialized location by scanning.

Move variations
Within a warehouse, there are different types of serialized stock moves performed. The type of stock move is based on the location. Type Serial-to-Multiple Serial-to-Serial Serial-to-Type Multiple-to-Serial Multiple-to-Multiple Multiple-to-Type Location Pallets from a high density location to a non-rack storage location Pallets from a high density location to another high density location Pallets from a high density location to a high density picking area Pallets from a non-rack storage location to a high-density area Pallets from a non-rack storage location to another non-rack storage location Pallets from the non-rack storage location to the picking area

Procedure
To perform a stock move from a multiple storage location to a rack, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Stock Moves, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry menu screen appears.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Multiple Storage Location to a Rack Location

9-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 2, Regular Move, on the command line, then press Enter. A screen appears,

displaying the From Location and To Location fields.

6. Enter the appropriate data in the From Location field.

Depending on how the From Location field is set in the Default Location Maintenance, the program will work in one of three ways: 00=No restrictions or validation of pallet move from location 01=From location is invalid, but F2 accepts the move 02=Prohibits pallet moves from an invalid from location

7. Tab to the To Location field, and enter the appropriate data. The screen automatically

updates and a Serial# field appears.


8. Scan/enter the serial number to be moved. The screen automatically refreshes, displaying the

Stock Movement Data Entry screen with the From Location and To Location fields. The move is accepted. If entering the serial number manually, type an S before the number. If the To Location is not in use, the screen will change back to the original stock move screen. If the To Location IS in use, a message of Loc in Use, F2-Accpt appears. Press F2 to accept, F12 for the previous screen, or F3 to exit.
9. Continue to perform stock moves or press F3 to exit.

9-14

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Multiple Storage Location to a Rack Location

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Type Location to a Multiple Storage Location
Introduction
A stock move from a type location to a multiple storage location is the process of moving nonserialized batteries (eaches), from a type location, to a multiple storage (multiple serialized pallets) location.

Move variations
Within a warehouse, there are different types of serialized stock moves performed. The type of stock move is based on the location. Type Serial-to-Multiple Serial-to-Serial Serial-to-Type Multiple-to-Serial Multiple-to-Multiple Multiple-to-Type Location Pallets from a high-density location to a non-rack storage location Pallets from a high density location to another high density location Pallets from a high density location to a high density picking area Pallets from a non-rack storage location to a high-density area Pallets from a non-rack storage location to another non-rack storage location Pallets from the non-rack storage location to the picking area

Procedure
To perform a stock move from a type location to a multiple storage location, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Stock Moves, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry menu screen appears.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Type Location to a Multiple Storage Location

9-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 2, Regular Move, on the line, then press Enter. The screen refreshes and

displays the From Location and To Location fields.

6. Enter the appropriate information in the From Location field.

Depending on how the From Location field is set in the Default Location Maintenance, the program will work in one of three ways: 00=No restrictions or validation of pallet move from location 01=From location is invalid, but F2 accepts the move 02=Prohibits pallet moves from an invalid from location

9-16

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Type Location to a Multiple Storage Location

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the To Location field, and enter the appropriate information. The screen

automatically refreshes, displaying a new screen.

8. Enter/scan the battery type to be moved in the Type field. 9. Tab to the Qty field, and enter the quantity of batteries.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Type Location to a Multiple Storage Location

9-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Field exit from the Qty field.

11. Press Enter. The data is accepted. 12. Press Enter. The number of label sets option appears. 13. Keep the suggested label sets, or change the sets if desired. 14. Press Enter. The label set(s) is printed. 15. Continue to perform stock moves or press F3 to exit.

9-18

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Type Location to a Multiple Storage Location

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Reject Repair to a Multiple Storage Location
Introduction
A stock move from a type location to a multiple storage location is the process of moving nonserialized batteries (eaches), from a type location, to a multiple storage (multiple serialized pallets) location.

Move variations
Within a warehouse, there are different types of serialized stock moves performed. The type of stock move is based on the location. Type Serial-to-Multiple Serial-to-Serial Serial-to-Type Multiple-to-Serial Multiple-to-Multiple Multiple-to-Type Location Pallets from a high-density location to a non-rack storage location Pallets from a high density location to another high density location Pallets from a high density location to a high density picking area Pallets from a non-rack storage location to a high-density area Pallets from a non-rack storage location to another non-rack storage location Pallets from the non-rack storage location to the picking area

Procedure
To perform a stock move from reject repair to a multiple storage location, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 2, Stock Moves, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry menu screen appears.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Reject Repair to a Multiple Storage Location

9-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 2, Regular Move, on the command line, then press Enter.

6. Enter the appropriate information in the From Location field.

Depending on how the From Location field is set in the Default Location Maintenance, the program will work in one of three ways: 00=No restrictions or validation of pallet move from location 01=From location is invalid, but F2 accepts the move 02=Prohibits pallet moves from an invalid from location

9-20

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Reject Repair to a Multiple Storage Location

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the To Location field, and enter the appropriate information. The screen

automatically refreshes.

8. Enter/scan the battery type to be moved in the Type field. 9. Tab to the Qty field, and enter the quantity of batteries.

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Reject Repair to a Multiple Storage Location

9-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Field exit from the Qty field.

11. Press Enter. The data is accepted. 12. Press Enter. The number of label sets option appears. 13. Keep the suggested label sets, or change the sets if desired. 14. Press Enter. The label set(s) is printed. 15. Continue to perform stock moves or press F3 to exit.

9-22

How to Perform a Regular Move From a Reject Repair to a Multiple Storage Location

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Boost In (From Multiple to Eaches)


Introduction
Occasionally, batteries will need to be recharged for various reasons.

Procedure
To move a battery into boost, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Operations

Menu screen appears.

How to Perform Boost In (From Multiple to Eaches)

9-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 6, Boost In, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the serial number in the Serial# field, then press Enter. The data for the serial number

appears. You must type an S before the serial number if entering it manually.
6. Enter any corrections to the data, then press Enter. 7. Continue to move batteries into boost or press F3 to exit.

9-24

How to Perform Boost In (From Multiple to Eaches)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Boost Out (From Eaches to Multiple)


Introduction
Once batteries are boosted, they will need to be moved back into production.

Procedure
To move a battery out of boost, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations menu

screen appears.
4. Enter option 7, Boost Out, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the battery type in the Type field. 6. Tab to the Qty field and enter the number of batteries to be moved out of boost.

How to Perform Boost Out (From Eaches to Multiple)

9-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the Voltage field and enter the voltage of the battery.

8. Press Enter to accept the data. 9. Continue to move batteries out of boost or press F3 to exit.

9-26

How to Perform Boost Out (From Eaches to Multiple)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Create Transfer Labels Using Boost Out


Introduction
Creating transfer labels using boost out is a function in which batteries are coming out of formation to a completed staging area. This function is only used at specific locations.

Procedure
To create transfer labels using Boost Out, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations menu

screen appears.
4. Enter option 7, Boost Out, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the battery type in the Type field. 6. Tab to the Qty field and enter the number of batteries.

How to Create Transfer Labels Using Boost Out

9-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Field exit in the Quantity field.

8. Press Enter to accept the data.

9-28

How to Create Transfer Labels Using Boost Out

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter. A new screen appears, displaying label sets information.

10. Verify the number of label sets in the Number of Label Sets field and change the default

value if necessary.
11. Field exit, then press Enter. The Stock Movement Data Entry screen reappears. 12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Create Transfer Labels Using Boost Out

9-29

Exide Technologies, Inc.

9-30

How to Create Transfer Labels Using Boost Out

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Unproduce Transfer Labels Using Boost In


Introduction
After batteries are formed, it is necessary to create transfer labels for a pallet before it is shipped to another Exide location. If a label is accidentally created, it must then be unproduced. This function is only used at specific locations.

Procedure
To unproduce transfer labels using Boost In, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations menu

screen appears.
4. Enter option 6, Boost In, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry screen appears.

How to Unproduce Transfer Labels Using Boost In

9-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the serial number to unproduce in the Serial# field. The screen automatically refreshes,

and the blank Stock Movement Data Entry screen reappears. You must type an S before the serial number if entering it manually. Enter the serial number and press Enter after the Stock Movement Data Entry screen reappears to verify that the pallet was unproduced. The message Pallet Not Found appears.
6. Press F3 to exit.

9-32

How to Unproduce Transfer Labels Using Boost In

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Directed Putaway Move


Introduction
Batteries within an Exide facility may need to be moved from one location to another using a directed put away move. This procedure applies only to the 879 distribution center (Oklahoma City).

Procedure
To perform a directed put away move, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 11, Warehouse Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Warehouse Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations menu

screen appears.
4. Enter option 2, Stock Moves, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock Movement

Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Directed Putaway Move

9-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 3, Directed Put Away, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Movement Data Entry screen appears, displaying the Serial# field.

6. Scan/enter the Serial Number in the Serial# field, then press Enter. The type on the pallet,

the From Location, and the Suggested Location appear. Type an S preceding the serial number if entering it manually.

9-34

How to Perform a Directed Putaway Move

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Scan/enter the location in which the pallet will be placed in the Verify field. After entering

the location, the Stock Movement Data Entry screen displaying the Serial# field reappears. If scanning a location other than the suggested location, the message Location Mismatch appears. Press F2 to override. Overrides can only occur to another location within the same letter.
8. Continue to perform directed put away moves, or press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Directed Putaway Move

9-35

Exide Technologies, Inc.

9-36

How to Perform a Directed Putaway Move

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Cycle Count Module


How to Perform a Cycle Count
Introduction
Each distribution center will perform a cycle count to reconcile the inventory and to have accurate data in the system. This document lays out the steps in the system to perform during a cycle count.

Procedure
To perform a cycle count, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3.

Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle Count Menu screen appears. Note: All customer and transfer orders are shipped. No orders can be between packed and shipped status. Perform daily balancing to assure that all inventory transactions have been done correctly.

4. Run the Beginning Costed Stock Status report by typing 2 on the command line. This is the

baseline report from which comparisons will be manually calculated. The report is sorted and totaled by G/L Class with an additional sort by third number.

How to Perform a Cycle Count

10-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The screen displays the message Beginning Costed Stock Status submitted to

batch.

6. Run the Finishing Material report by typing 3 on the command line. 7. Press Enter. The screen displays the message Finishing Material submitted to batch.

10-2

How to Perform a Cycle Count

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Run the Multiple Serial Locations report by typing 4 on the command line, then pressing

Enter.
9. Verify the counts in these locations from the Multiple Serial Locations function. If pallets are

found in these locations that do not appear on the report, then run a Stock History by Serial Num. Report by typing 7, then pressing Enter. Use Option 10, Stock Locator Moves, to place the pallet in the proper location. Note: See How to Run a Stock History by Serial Number Report and How to Perform Stock Locator Moves for further instructions.

10. Run the Single Serial Locations procedure by typing 5 on the command line, then pressing

Enter. If pallets are found in these locations that do not appear on the report, then run a Stock History by Serial Num. report. Use Option 10, Stock Locator Moves, to place the pallet in the proper locations.
11. Run the Non-Serialized Locations report by typing 6 on the command line. 12. Press Enter. The screen displays the message Non-Serialized Locations submitted to

batch.

13. Run the Final Count Keying report to enter the new balances by typing 14 on the command

line, then pressing Enter. Note: See How to Enter Final Count Keying for special instructions on entering the new balances.

14. Run the Final Costed Stock Status report to compare to the Beginning Costed Stock Status by

typing 15 on the command line.

How to Perform a Cycle Count

10-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press Enter. The screen displays the message Final Costed Stock Status submitted to

batch.

16. Press F12 to return to the previous menu.

10-4

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number


Introduction
The Stock History by Serial Number Inquiry screen details the entire history for a specific serial number.

Procedure
To inquire on a stock history by serial number, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Stock History by Serial Number, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Select Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing ML$SER, and enter the search comparison value in the Test

column. Note: Press F1 in the field to view possible values.

6. Tab to the Value column, and enter the serial number(s) to search.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

10-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The Display Report screen appears.

8. Press F3 to exit.

10-6

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves


Introduction
Each distribution center will perform a cycle count to reconcile the inventory and to have accurate data in the system. This document explains the stock move process during a cycle count.

Procedure
To perform a stock locator move, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 10, Stock Locator Moves, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Movement Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

10-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 2, Regular Move, on the line.

6. Press Enter. A screen appears, displaying a From Location and a To Location field.

10-8

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the appropriate data in the From Location field.

Note:

Depending on how the From Location field is set in the Default Location Maintenance, the program will work in one of three ways: 00=No restrictions or validation of pallet move from location 01=From location is invalid, but F2 accepts the move 02=Prohibits pallet moves from an invalid from location

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

10-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the To Location field, and enter the appropriate data. The screen automatically

updates and a Serial# field appears.

9. Scan/enter the serial number to be moved. The screen automatically refreshes, displaying the

Stock Movement Data Entry screen with the From Location and To Location fields. The move is accepted so that the batteries are no longer associated with the serial number. Note: If entering the serial number manually, type S before the number.

10. Continue to perform stock moves or press F3 to exit.

10-10

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter Final Count Keying


Introduction
Final count keying is the process to update the locator with the new ending balances from the non-serialized location and finishing material reports. The ending balance must be keyed to allow the system to compute the amount of the adjustment to be made. For any items listed on the non-serialized location and finishing materials reports with a quantity-on-hand, whether positive or negative, the actual count must be keyed. A zero must be keyed if zero was counted.

Procedure
To key the final count for a cycle count, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Enter Final Count Keying

10-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter CC in the Reason Code, then press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry

screen refreshes displaying additional fields.

6. Enter the battery type in the Type field. 7. Tab to the Loc field, and enter the location.

10-12

How to Enter Final Count Keying

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the New Balance field, and enter the number of on-hand batteries in the location.

Note:

Enter 0.00 if zero were counted.

9. Press Enter to accept the data. The original The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen

appears.
10. Press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Final Count Keying

10-13

Exide Technologies, Inc.

10-14

How to Enter Final Count Keying

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions


Introduction
A Cycle Count (CC) conversion displays the adjustments made to the on-hand quantity of a locations battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform a cycle count stock adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cycle

Count Menu appears.


4. Enter option 16, CC Cycle Count Conversion, on the command line, then press Enter. The

CC Cycle Count Conversion screen appears.

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions

10-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Type 2 in the OP column in the row containing CC Conversion (Cycle Count), then press

Enter. The Selective Change Prompt appears.

6. Tab to the Data Selection row of the 1 column, and type 1. 7. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

10-16

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the row containing Order Date and enter the order date in the Selection Value

column.
9. Press Enter to accept the data. 10. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 11. Press Enter. The CC Cycle Count Conversion screen appears. 12. Type 1 in the OP column adjacent to CC Conversion (Cycle Count), then press Enter.

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions

10-17

Exide Technologies, Inc.

10-18

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Physical Inventory Module


How to Begin a Physical Inventory
Introduction
This document contains the information and steps each distribution center must perform during a physical inventory. Each stage should be followed to verify accuracy of the inventory.

Procedure
Before beginning a physical inventory, check for pallets finished for customer orders that have not been shipped. OE sites will perform the following steps: The following steps should be performed for all the Original Equipment sites.
1. Request the Auto Transfer Program to be put on hold after the 1:00 AM Central Time run. 2. Agree on a time that all production, corrections, etc. will be performed between the two sites. 3. Request for the Auto Transfer Program to be run manually one more time after all entries

are done.
4. Begin inventory at plant and DC. 5. Request for the Auto Transfer Program to be taken off hold after the inventory is done.

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

11-1

Exide Technologies, Inc.

All sites will perform the following steps: Step 1 Check for pallets finished for customer orders that have not been shipped by performing the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

11-2

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.

3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator screen appears.

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

11-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 6, Single Type Lookup, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Enter EQ in the Test field and FINISHED in the Value field, then press Enter.

Note:

If all batteries have been shipped, NO records will display.

11-4

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Step 2 If there are no finished pallets, skip to Step 3. If there are finished pallets in the stock locator, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

11-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.

3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menu screen appears.

11-6

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 3, Trip Master Inquiry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Trip

Master Inquiry screen appears.

5. Scroll down the list looking for any trip that is not a status of New or Shipped. This will

tell you which trips need to be shipped. If no trips need to be shipped, call the Customer Assistance Center (1-800-462-9062). Note: There can be no finished pallets at the start of the physical inventory.

Step 3 Execute normal daily balancing to the Battery Activity Report by performing the following steps: 1. Verify Purchase Order Receipts
2. Verify Transfer Order Receipts 3. Verify Transfer Order Shipments 4. Verify FSO Shipments 5. Verify Transfer Returns 6. Verify Customer Shipments 7. Verify the Customer Returns 8. Verify the Adjustments

Note:

You can make corrections, shipments, and adjustments until the physical inventory is started.

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

11-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

When all balancing is complete and there are no finished pallets, a physical inventory can begin. To perform a physical inventory, perform the following steps:
1. Sign on to perform the physical inventory. The proper login is as follows:

User ID: PHYXXX (where XXX represents the branch/plant) Password: Obtain this from the Inventory Control Manager Note: If there is a distribution center and PARC at your location, then an 80 cannot be used to switch between the two. Each branch/plant has a specific sign-on that must be used.

After you log in, the Physical Inventory Menu screen appears.

11-8

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Perform each step below carefully to ensure accuracy. Finish each step prior to execution of the next step:
1. Enter option 2, Begin Physical Inventory, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Begin Physical Inventory submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen and a backup file is created for variance reporting. When the process completes, a Beginning Costed Stock Status report prints.

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

11-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 3, Finishing Material, on the command line, then press Enter. The message

Finishing Material submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen. This report represents the inventory not covered by the reports used to audit the serialized locations. This report may be used later to compare what was counted on tickets into the inventory for these locations.

11-10

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Enter option 4, Multiple Serial Locations, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Multiple Serial Locations submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen. The personnel counting the pallets to audit serialized locations will use this report. This report may be used later to compare what was counted on tickets into the inventory for these locations.

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

11-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 5, Single Serial Locations, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Single Serial Locations submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen. The personnel counting the pallets to audit serialized locations will use this report. This report may be used later to compare what was counted on tickets into the inventory for these locations.

11-12

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 6, Non-Serialized Locations, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Non-Serialized Locations submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen. This report represents the inventory not covered by the reports used to audit the serialized locations. This report may be used later to compare what was counted on tickets into the inventory for these locations.

6. Enter option 7 (if desired), Stock History by Serial Number, on the command line, then

press Enter. This enables the user to determine where in the system a pallet is located versus where it actually resides. See How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Numbers concerning this option.

7. Enter option 10 (if desired), Stock Locator Moves, on the command line, then press Enter.

This option is to be used only to perform serialized pallet moves. Do not use this option to move batteries into or out of type locations. 8. Enter option 11 (if desired), Tag Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. Tag Keying is used to enter all of the inventory ticket information. There are no batch entry screens, thus creating no way to reconcile individual batches. It is recommended to create bundles of 100, then total the bundle prior to entry. See How to Perform Tag Keying for more information.

9. Enter option 12, Serialized Pallet Maintenance, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Physical Inventory- Serial Maintenance screen appears. This allows the user to create or delete serial numbers for rack locations as required. For more information on serialized pallet maintenance, see How to Perform Serialized Pallet Maintenance.

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

11-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Enter option 14, Inventory Tags Report, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Inventory Tags Report submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen. This report lists, in tag number sequence, all the tickets and information keyed and any missing tickets between the lowest and highest ticket numbers. A crosscheck of this with the actual tickets will help provide accuracy. See How to Submit an Inventory Tags Report for more information.

11-14

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter option 15, Variance Detail Report, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Variance Detail Report submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen. This report displays the types, quantities and dollars of all items with count discrepancies. See How to Submit a Variance Detail Report for more information.

Note:

This must run prior to option 16, Post Physical.

12. Rerun the Variance Detail Report as required to make corrections.

For discrepancies, make all changes in Tag Keying or Serialized Pallet Maintenance. Only perform this step if all the previous steps have been executed and are clean. See How to Post Physical Inventory for procedures on posting physical inventory.

13. Enter option 16, Post Physical, on the command line, then press Enter.

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

11-15

Exide Technologies, Inc.

11-16

How to Begin a Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Numbers


Introduction
The Stock History by Serial Numbers Inquiry screen details all the history for specific serial numbers.

Procedure
To inquire on a stock history by serial numbers, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Physical Inventory Menu screen.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Numbers

11-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 7, Stock History by Serial Number, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Select Records screen appears.

3. Tab to the row containing ML$SER, and enter the search comparison value in the Test

column. Note: Press F1 in the field to view possible values.

4. Tab to the Value column, and enter the serial number(s) to search.

11-18

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Numbers

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Display Report screen appears.

6. Press F3 to exit.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Numbers

11-19

Exide Technologies, Inc.

11-20

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Numbers

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Tag Keying


Introduction
Tag keying is used to enter all of the inventory ticket information. No batch entry screens are available; consequently, there is no way to reconcile individual batches. Inventory cards should be bundled in specific size blocks, recommended is 100, and totaled per bundle prior to entry.

Procedure
To enter inventory through tag keying, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Physical Inventory Menu screen.

How to Perform Tag Keying

11-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 11, Tag Keying, on the command line, the press Enter. The Tag Keying screen

appears.

To Inquire on a Ticket 1. Enter the ticket number in the Tag# field, or enter the GNB part number or coded battery type in the Item# field. 2. Press Enter and the ticket information appears in the appropriate fields. To Add a Ticket and Data 1. Enter the ticket number in the Tag Number column. Note: There is online checking for duplicate tag numbers.

2. Tab to the Item Number column and enter the GNB part number or coded battery type. 3. Tab to the Stock Loc. column and enter the location.

Note:

For finishing materials, there cannot be a location. For non-finishing material items, there must be a location.

4. Tab to the Quantity on Tag# column and enter the quantity on the ticket, then press Enter.

To Delete a Tag Number


1. Enter the tag number, delete the entry, and press <Tab>. 2.

Enter the appropriate tag number and data and press Enter.

11-22

How to Perform Tag Keying

Exide Technologies, Inc.

To Modify Data for a Tag Number Key over the incorrect data within the columns and press Enter.

How to Perform Tag Keying

11-23

Exide Technologies, Inc.

11-24

How to Perform Tag Keying

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Serialized Pallet Maintenance


Introduction
Serialized pallet maintenance enables the user to create or delete serial numbers for rack locations as required.

Procedure
To perform serialized pallet maintenance, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Physical Inventory Menu screen.

How to Perform Serialized Pallet Maintenance

11-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 12, Serialized Pallet Maintenance, on the command line, the press Enter. The

Physical Inventory Serial Maintenance screen appears.

To Create a Serial Number


1. Press F6 and the screen refreshes.

11-26

How to Perform Serialized Pallet Maintenance

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter the battery type in the Type field. 3. Tab to the In Loc field and enter the location for the batteries. 4. Tab to the Qty field and enter the quantity. 5. Tab to the Boost Date field and enter the correct boost date for the batteries. 6. Tab to the MFG Date field and enter the correct manufacturing date for the batteries. 7. Tab to the Voltage field and enter the correct voltage for the batteries. The new serial

number appears at the bottom of the screen. Note: There is online edit checking to validate the data entered.

To Delete a Serial Number 1. Enter the serial number preceded by an S and the screen populates with the data associated with the serial number.
2. Press F7 and the serial is denoted as deleted at the bottom of the screen. 3. Press F3 to exit the menu.

How to Perform Serialized Pallet Maintenance

11-27

Exide Technologies, Inc.

11-28

How to Perform Serialized Pallet Maintenance

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Submit an Inventory Tags Report


Introduction
The Inventory Tags Report is a combination of the LOS Missing Ticket Report and the Batch Ticket Keying Report. This report will list, in tag number sequence, all the tickets and information keyed in and any missing tickets between the lowest and highest ticket numbers.

Procedure
To submit an Inventory Tags Report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Physical Inventory Menu screen.

How to Submit an Inventory Tags Report

11-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 14, Inventory Tags Report, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Inventory Tags Report submitted to batch appears.

3. Cross-check the report with the actual tickets for accuracy.

11-30

How to Submit an Inventory Tags Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Submit a Variance Detail Report


Introduction
The Variance Detail Report displays the types, quantities, and dollars of all items that have count discrepancies. This report must be run before option 16, Post Physical.

Procedure
To submit a variance detail report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Physical Inventory Menu screen.

How to Submit a Variance Detail Report

11-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 15, Variance Detail Report, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Variance Detail Report submitted to batch appears.

3. Return to the Tag Keying screen or Serialized Pallet Maintenance screen and make

corrections to the report.


4. Re-run the report after the corrections are made.

11-32

How to Submit a Variance Detail Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Post Physical Inventory


Introduction
This is the final procedure that will be executed within the physical inventory module. Prior to execution of this procedure, all options on the Physical Inventory Menu must be completed and the Variance Detail Report must be clean.

Procedure
To post physical inventory, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Physical Inventory Menu screen.

How to Post Physical Inventory

11-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 16, Post Physical, on the command line, the press Enter. The Physical

Inventory Update Submit screen appears.

Note:

Any reports not ran will be identified at the bottom of this screen.

3. Obtain the password from the Inventory Control Manager, enter the appropriate password in

the Password field, then press Enter. The Physical Inventory Menu screen displays with the message, Physical Inventory has been submitted. After completion, a new version of all reports will be printed.

11-34

How to Post Physical Inventory

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves


Introduction
Use the Stock Locator Moves function to perform only serialized pallet moves. Note: Use the Stock Locator Moves function only for moving serialized pallets. Do not use this function for moving batteries into or out of type locations. For example, 5555Z is a type location.

Procedure
To perform serialized pallet moves, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Physical Inventory Menu screen.

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

11-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 10, Stock Locator Moves, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Movement Data Entry screen appears.

11-36

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Enter option 2, Regular Move, on the command line, then press Enter. A screen appears,

displaying the From Location and To Location fields.

4. Enter the appropriate data in the From Location field.

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

11-37

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Tab to the To Location field, and enter the appropriate data. The screen automatically

updates and a Serial# field appears.

11-38

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Scan/enter the serial number to be moved. The screen automatically refreshes, displaying the

Stock Movement Data Entry screen with the From Location and To Location fields. The move is accepted. Note: If entering the serial number manually, type an S before the number.

7. Continue to perform stock moves, or press F3 to exit.

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

11-39

Exide Technologies, Inc.

11-40

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

Exide Technologies, Inc.

DC Set Up Module
How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location
Introduction
You must define a location to store the materials at the distribution center.

Procedure
To enter/add a branch/plant location, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

12-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Operations Team Menu screen appears.

12-2

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 6, DC Set Up Menus, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Set Up Menu screen appears.

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

12-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, Branch/Plant Location Master, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Branch/Plant Location Master screen appears.

12-4

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Enter A (Add) in the Action Code field. 9. Tab to the Branch/Plant field, and enter the branch/plant number. 10. Tab to the Location field, and enter the inventory location.

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

12-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Tab to the LOD column, and enter 1 for the level of detail for the inventory location. 12. Tab to the Location Codes 5 column, and enter

S for serialized, M for multiple, or T for type locations.

Note:

Move the cursor to the last position in the Location Codes 5 column by pressing the spacebar before entering the stocking type.

13. Tab to the Location Codes 6 column, and enter DOOR, if applicable. 14. Tab to the Location Codes 10 column, and enter HELD for Manugistics, if applicable.

12-6

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press Enter. The system saves the location data, and the Branch/Plant Location Master

screen appears.

16. Type I (Inquire) in the Action Code field.

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

12-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Type the appropriate branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field.

12-8

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

Exide Technologies, Inc. 18. Press Enter, and the Branch/Plant Location Master screen displays the new location in the

Location column.

19. Repeat the process to enter or add another location, or press F3 to exit the screen.

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

12-9

Exide Technologies, Inc.

12-10

How to Enter/Add a Branch/Plant Location

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Change/Delete a Branch/Plant Location


Introduction
You may have to change or delete the branch/plant location at the distribution center.

Procedure
To change or delete a branch/plant location, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line. 3. Press Enter. The Operations Team Menu screen appears. 4. Enter option 6, DC Set Up Menus, on the command line. 5. Press Enter. The DC Set Up Menu screen appears. 6. Enter option 2, Branch/Plant Location Master, on the command line.

How to Change/Delete a Branch/Plant Location

12-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The Branch/Plant Location Master screen appears.

8. Enter C (Change) in the Action Code field.

12-12

How to Change/Delete a Branch/Plant Location

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Branch/Plant field, and enter the branch/plant number. 10. Tab to the field containing the location you want to change or delete. 11. Make changes to the location in the appropriate fields.

Note:

For this example, the line has been cleared in order to delete the location.

How to Change/Delete a Branch/Plant Location

12-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Press Enter, and the Branch/Plant Location Master screen reappears.

13. Type I (Inquire) in the Action Code field.

12-14

How to Change/Delete a Branch/Plant Location

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Type the appropriate branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field.

How to Change/Delete a Branch/Plant Location

12-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press Enter, and the Branch/Plant Location Master screen reappears.

Note:

The location (0001Z) has been deleted.

16. Repeat the process to change or delete another location, or press F3 to exit the screen.

12-16

How to Change/Delete a Branch/Plant Location

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to View Default Location Maintenance


Introduction
You may need to view the default location maintenance screen to edit settings for the business unit.

Procedure
To view the default location maintenance, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, DC Set Up Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Set Up

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Default Location Maintenance, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Default Location Maintenance screen appears.

5. Enter I (Inquiry) in the Action Code field. 6. Tab to the Business Unit field, and enter the three-digit business unit.

How to View Default Location Maintenance

12-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The screen displays information for the selected business unit.

8. Press F3 to exit.

12-18

How to View Default Location Maintenance

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Work Day Calendar


Introduction
You must set up a work day calendar for the production of batteries.

Procedure
To enter the work day calendar, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, DC Set Up Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Set Up

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Work Day Calendar, on the command line, then press Enter. The Work

Day Calendar screen appears.

How to Enter a Work Day Calendar

12-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter I (Inquire) in the Action Code field. 6. Validate or enter the calendar date in the Calendar Year and Calendar Month fields. 7. Press Enter. The Work Day Calendar screen appears.

8. Perform one of the following steps to set the work day calendar:

IF you want to Add a new work day calendar, Change the work day calendar displayed, calendar:

THEN enter A in the Action Code field. C in the Action Code field.

9. Perform one of the following steps to specify the status of the dates on the work day

IF you want to specify a date as THEN enter A work day on the calendar, A holiday on the calendar, A weekend day on the work calendar,
10. Press Enter. The calendar data is accepted. 11. Press F3 to exit the screen.

W in the date field. H in the date field. E in the date field.

12-20

How to Enter a Work Day Calendar

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Print Location Labels


Introduction
Use this function to print location labels.

Procedure
To print location labels, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, DC Set Up Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Set Up

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Print Location Labels, on the command line.

How to Print Location Labels

12-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Print Location Barcode Labels screen appears.

12-22

How to Print Location Labels

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter the beginning location in the From Location field for the range of locations for which

you want to print labels.


7. Enter the ending location in the To Location field.

Note:

To print a label for one location only, enter that location in both the From Location and To Location fields.

8. Press Enter. The location label(s) prints. 9. Press F3 to exit the function.

How to Print Location Labels

12-23

Exide Technologies, Inc.

12-24

How to Print Location Labels

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Print Text Labels


Introduction
Use this function to print text labels.

Procedure
To print text labels, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, DC Set Up Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Set Up

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Print Text Labels, on the command line, then press Enter. The Print

Location Barcode Labels screen appears.

How to Print Text Labels

12-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the text you want to print on the label in the Enter Text To Print field.

6. Press Enter. The DC Set Up Menu screen appears and the text label prints.

12-26

How to Print Text Labels

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Technical Operations Module


How to Start Printers
Introduction
These steps detail the process required to start the printers.

Procedure
To start printers, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Start Printers

13-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 14, Start Printers, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The message PRINTERS FOR LOCATION 477 HAVE BEEN

STARTED appears at the bottom of the screen identifying the printers that have been started.

13-2

How to Start Printers

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Vary Off Device


Introduction
Varying off a device is the process of taking a machine offline to possibly fix a problem.

Procedure
To vary off a device, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 15, Vary Off Device, on the command line.

How to Vary Off Device

13-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Press Enter. The Vary Off a Device (VARYOFPXXX) screen appears.

13-4

How to Vary Off Device

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter the device ID plus the 3-digit number of the device in the Device To Vary Off/DXXX

PXXX field, then press Enter. The Work with Configuration Status screen appears displaying the device that was varied off. Note: Use P for Printer or D for Display as the device ID.

5. Press F3 to exit.

How to Vary Off Device

13-5

Exide Technologies, Inc.

13-6

How to Vary Off Device

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Vary On Device


Introduction
Varying on a device is the process of bringing a machine back online in order to use it.

Procedure
To vary on a device, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 16, Vary On Device, on the command line.

How to Vary On Device

13-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Press Enter. The Vary On Device (VARYON) screen appears.

4. Enter the device ID in the Device To Vary On field, then press Enter. The device goes back

online and the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen appears.

13-8

How to Vary On Device

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Work with Active Printers


Introduction
The function of working with active printers is to direct the output for a specific machines documents.

Procedure
To work with active printers, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 17, Work with Active Printers, on the command line.

How to Work with Active Printers

13-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Press Enter. The Work with Writers (WRKWTR) screen appears.

13-10

How to Work with Active Printers

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter the device address or number of the printer in the Writer field. 5.

Press Enter and the screen refreshes and displays the Output field.

How to Work with Active Printers

13-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Perform the following steps to display or print the document:

IF you want to Display the document on the monitor, Print the document on the printer,

THEN enter * in the Output field. *PRINT in the Output field.

7. Press Enter and the Work with All Printers screen appears.

8. Locate the device you want to work with and enter the appropriate option (1-8) in the Opt

column.
9.

Press Enter and the corresponding screen appears.

13-12

How to Work with Active Printers

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Work with Device Status


Introduction
This utility identifies the status of a device.

Procedure
To work with device status, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 18, Work with Device Status, on the command line.

How to Work with Device Status

13-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Press Enter. The Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) screen appears.

4. Enter *DEV in the Type field. 5. Press Tab and enter the device address in the Configuration description field. 6. Press Enter twice and the Work with Configuration Status screen appears.

13-14

How to Work with Device Status

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Locate the desired device and enter the appropriate option (1, 2, 5, 8, 9, or 13) in the Opt

column.
8. Press Enter and the screen corresponding to the option selected in Step 7 appears. 9. Press F3 to exit.

How to Work with Device Status

13-15

Exide Technologies, Inc.

13-16

How to Work with Device Status

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Work with User Spooled Files


Introduction
This utility allows you to view or work with a users spooled files.

Procedure
To work with spooled files, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 19, Work with User Spooled Files, on the command line.

How to Work with User Spooled Files

13-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Press Enter. The Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) screen appears.

4. Enter the user ID in the User field.

Note:

The default value is *CURRENT, which is the person who is signed on.

5. Press Enter and the Work with All Spooled Files screen appears.

13-18

How to Work with User Spooled Files

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Locate the desired job/report in the File column and enter the appropriate option (1 through

9) in the Opt column.


7. Press Enter and the screen corresponding to the option selected in Step 6 appears. 8. Press F3 to exit.

How to Work with User Spooled Files

13-19

Exide Technologies, Inc.

13-20

How to Work with User Spooled Files

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Work with Query


Introduction
This utility allows you to view or work with a users files.

Procedure
To work with query, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 20, Work With Query, on the command line, then press Enter. The Work

with Queries screen appears.

3. Enter the desired option and query name in the appropriate fields. 4. Press Enter. 5. Press F3 to exit.

How to Work with Query

13-21

Exide Technologies, Inc.

13-22

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Reboot Your Scanner


Introduction
This procedure is used to reboot-your scanner if you cant get a sign-on screen.

Procedure
To reboot your scanner, perform the following steps:
1. Press the Orange function key, the Yellow enter key, and the On/Off key simultaneously. A

screen appears with the following three options: B L Q Boot System Run Loader Power Down If the scanner turns off, press the On/Off key to turn it back on. The boot system screen should appear.

Note:

2. Press B (Boot System). The scanner reboots and the sign-on screen appears.

How to Reboot Your Scanner

13-23

Exide Technologies, Inc.

13-24

How to Reboot Your Scanner

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Purchase Orders Module


How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)
Introduction
This utility allows you to process expense orders.

Procedure
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

14-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.

3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.

14-2

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 2, Non-Inventry/Supplier (OP), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Non-Inventry/Supplier (OP) screen appears.

5. Tab to the Branch/Plant field and enter the number of the company the purchase is made

for.
6. Tab to the Order Date field and enter todays date.

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

14-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the Vendor field and press F1. The Name Search lookup appears.

8. Tab to the Alpha Name field and enter the name of the supplier. 9. Tab to the Search Type field and type V.

10. Press Enter to bring up the vendor listing based on the selection criteria.

14-4

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Tab to the Option field by the desired vendor, type 4 then press Enter. The vendor number

appears in the Vendor Number field.

12. Tab to the Address Number field and press F1.

Note:

This should be the address number of the location to receive the goods on the order. The processing options are currently set to default the branch plants address book number if this field is left blank.

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

14-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Type the place where the product should be delivered in the Alpha Name field and press

Enter. The location listings appear based on the selection criteria.

14. Tab to the Option field by the desired location, type 4 then press Enter. The address number

appears in the Address Number field.

14-6

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press Enter. The Purchase Order Detail screen appears.

16. Tab to the Account Number field and press F1. The Account Number lookup appears.

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

14-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Type the number of the company the order is charged to in the Skip to field.

18. Press Enter to view the company general ledger account.

14-8

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 19. Tab to the specific ledger account that you want to charge the purchase to and type 4.

Note:

The purchase order has unlimited lines for the ability to order different products from the same supplier.

20. Press Enter and the Purchase Order Detail screen reappears displaying the selected account

number.

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

14-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 21. Tab to the Description field and type a description of the account selected if there is not

already one.

22. Press Enter and a prompt appears above the line items.

14-10

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 23. Enter Y at the Enter Y to Record Order prompt and press Enter. The Non-Invntry /

Supplier (OP) screen reappears.

24. Continue to enter purchase orders or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Non-Inventory / Supplier (OP)

14-11

Exide Technologies, Inc.

14-12

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter an Inventory / Supplier (OF)


Introduction
Inventory items ordered by a GNB location must have an associated purchase order.

Procedure
To enter an inventory supplier, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Inventory/Supplier (OF), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Inventory/Supplier (OF) screen appears.

How to Enter an Inventory / Supplier (OF)

14-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the number for the vendor in the Vendor Number field, then press Enter twice. The

Purchase Order Detail screen appears.

6. Click in the Item Number field and enter the GNB part numbers. 7. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number to order. 8. Press Enter and a prompt to accept the order appears.

14-14

How to Enter an Inventory / Supplier (OF)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. The Inventory/Supplier (OF)

screen reappears.

10. Continue to enter purchase orders or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter an Inventory / Supplier (OF)

14-15

Exide Technologies, Inc.

14-16

How to Enter an Inventory / Supplier (OF)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Capital Equip, Sanction (OS)


Introduction
This screen is used for sanction purchase orders for approved capital spending.

Procedure
To enter an inventory supplier, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Capital Equip, Sanction (OS) on the command line, then press Enter. The

Capital Equip, Sanction (OS) screen appears.

5. Tab to the Branch/Plant field and type the name of the company the purchase is made for. 6. Tab to the Order Date field and type todays date.

How to Enter a Capital Equip, Sanction (OS)

14-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the Vendor Number field and enter the number for the vendor, then press Enter

twice. The Purchase Order Detail screen appears.

8. Click in the Item Number field and enter the GNB part numbers. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number to order. 10. Press Enter and a prompt to accept the order appears.

14-18

How to Enter a Capital Equip, Sanction (OS)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. The Inventory/Supplier (OF)

screen reappears.

12. Continue to enter purchase orders or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter a Capital Equip, Sanction (OS)

14-19

Exide Technologies, Inc.

14-20

How to Enter a Capital Equip, Sanction (OS)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)


Introduction
An OI purchase order is a one-sided purchase order that is used in specific circumstances to receive inventory.

Procedure
To create an OI purchase order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)

14-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 5, Inventory PO Entry (OI), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Inventory PO Entry (OI) screen appears.

5. Tab to the Vendor Number field and press F1. The Name Search lookup appears.

14-22

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Alpha Name field and enter the name of the supplier. 7. Tab to the Search Type field and type V.

8. Press Enter to bring up the vendor listing based on the selection criteria.

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)

14-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the O (option) field beside the desired vendor, type 4, and press Enter. The vendor

number appears in the Vendor Number field.

10. Tab to the Requested field and enter the date of the requested delivery.

14-24

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Press Enter twice. The Purchase Order Detail screen appears.

12. Tab to the Item Number field and enter one of the following:

Basic battery type Finished battery number Part numbers

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)

14-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number to order.

14. Press Enter, and a prompt to accept the order appears.

14-26

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. The Inventory PO Entry (OI)

screen reappears.

16. Continue to enter OI purchase orders, or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)

14-27

Exide Technologies, Inc.

14-28

How to Enter an Inventory PO Entry (OI)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Receipt from Exide Non-JDE (EI)


Introduction
An EI purchase order must be created in order to receive inventory items from a non-JDE Exide facility.

Procedure
To enter a receipt from an Exide non-JDE facility, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Rcpt From Exide Non-JDE (EI), on the command line, then press Enter.

The Rept From Exide Non-JDE (EI) screen appears.

How to Enter a Receipt from Exide Non-JDE (EI)

14-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the Exide non-JDE address number for the vendor in the Vendor Number field.

Note:

If Exide non-JDE location number is not known, Press F1, type Exide & the location name in the Alpha Name field, and an L in the Search Type field, then press Enter to select the location from a list.

6. Tab to the Requested field and enter the date of the requested delivery. 7. Tab to the Supplier SO field and enter the Exide LO# (order #), then press Enter twice. The

Purchase Order Detail screen appears.

14-30

How to Enter a Receipt from Exide Non-JDE (EI)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the Item Number field and enter the basic battery type, finished battery type, or part

number.
9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries you want to order.

10. Press Enter. A prompt to accept the order appears in the middle of the screen.

How to Enter a Receipt from Exide Non-JDE (EI)

14-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. The Rcpt From Exide Non-

JDE (EI) screen reappears.

12. Continue to enter purchase orders or press F3 to exit.

14-32

How to Enter a Receipt from Exide Non-JDE (EI)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Add/Change an Existing Inventory / Supplier (OF) PO


Introduction
The purchase order for materials ordered to refurbish the supplies at an Exide location may need to be modified.

Procedure
To add or change an inventory purchase order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 10, Change POs/Inventory (OF), on the command line, then press Enter. The

CHANGE POs/Inventory (OF) screen appears.

How to Add/Change an Existing Inventory / Supplier (OF) PO

14-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter an I in the Action Code.

6. Tab to the Order Number field and enter the number of the order you want to change, then

press Enter. The Purchase Order Detail screen appears.

14-34

How to Add/Change an Existing Inventory / Supplier (OF) PO

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to an available line in the Item Number column and enter the Exide part numbers to be

added. Note: Press F1 to display the Item Search screen to enter the appropriate item number.

8. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to order.

How to Add/Change an Existing Inventory / Supplier (OF) PO

14-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter, and a prompt to accept the order appears in the middle of the screen.

10. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. The CHANGE POs /

Inventory (OF) screen reappears.

11. Press F3 to exit.

14-36

How to Add/Change an Existing Inventory / Supplier (OF) PO

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Cancel Lines on POs (Existing Inventory POs)


Introduction
Occasionally items ordered on inventory POs will not be filled. If this occurs, the lines on the purchase ordered can be canceled.

Procedure
To cancel lines on existing inventory purchase orders, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Cancel lines on POs, on the command line, then press Enter. The Cancel

lines on POs screen appears.

How to Cancel Lines on POs (Existing Inventory POs)

14-37

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the purchase order number in the Order Number field, then press Enter. The open

lines on the purchase order are displayed.

6. Enter a 9 in the O column next to the line that you want to cancel.

14-38

How to Cancel Lines on POs (Existing Inventory POs)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter and a prompt appears to accept the order.

8. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. 9. Press F3 to exit.

How to Cancel Lines on POs (Existing Inventory POs)

14-39

Exide Technologies, Inc.

14-40

How to Cancel Lines on POs (Existing Inventory POs)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Change POs / Non-Inventory (OP)


Introduction
The purchase order for materials ordered to refurbish the supplies at an Exide location may need to be modified.

Procedure
To add or change an inventory purchase order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 9, Change POs / Non-Invntry (OP), on the command line, then press Enter.

The CHANGE POs/Non-Inventory (OP) screen appears.

How to Change POs / Non-Inventory (OP)

14-41

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter an I in the Action Code.

6. Tab to the Order Number field and enter the number of the order you want to change, then

press Enter. The Purchase Order Detail screen appears.

14-42

How to Change POs / Non-Inventory (OP)

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to an available line in the Item Number column and enter the Exide part numbers to be

added. Note: Press F1 to display the Item Search screen to enter the appropriate item number.

8. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to order.

How to Change POs / Non-Inventory (OP)

14-43

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter, and a prompt to accept the order appears in the middle of the screen.

10. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. The CHANGE POs / Non-

Invntry (OP) screen reappears.

11. Press F3 to exit.

14-44

How to Change POs / Non-Inventory (OP)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to View Orders Awaiting Approval


Introduction
You can locate all orders that await your approval and select orders to review for approval or rejection.

Procedure
To view orders awaiting approval, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Orders Awaiting Approval, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Orders Awaiting Approval screen appears.

How to View Orders Awaiting Approval

14-45

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the address number in the Address Number field and press Enter.

6. Enter 4 in the O column next to the desired order.

14-46

How to View Orders Awaiting Approval

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter and the Approval Review screen appears.

8. Press F3 to exit the Approval Review screen.

9. Press F3 to exit the Orders Awaiting Approval screen

How to View Orders Awaiting Approval

14-47

Exide Technologies, Inc.

14-48

How to View Orders Awaiting Approval

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Approval Review Option


Introduction
You must approve an order to authorize the purchase of items and services. After you approve all detail lines on an order, the system processes the order.

Procedure
To use the approval review option, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 15, Approval Review, on the command line, then press Enter. The Approval

Review screen appears.

How to Use the Approval Review Option

14-49

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the order number in the Order Number field and press Enter.

To Approve an Order
1. Enter 1 in the O column.

2. Press Enter to accept the order.

14-50

How to Use the Approval Review Option

Exide Technologies, Inc.

To Reject an Order
1. Enter 2 in the O column.

2. Press Enter to reject the order.

To Complete the Review


1. Enter Y or N at the system prompt.

Note:

If you enter Y (yes), the system displays the Check Password prompt. If you enter N (no), the system takes no further action.

2. Enter your sign-on password at the Password prompt. If you are accepting the order, the

system clears the Approval Review screen. If you rejected the order, the Approval/Rejections Reasons screen appears. Note: Enter X in the appropriate user defined categories and enter explanations as necessary.

3. Press F3 to exit.

How to Use the Approval Review Option

14-51

Exide Technologies, Inc.

14-52

How to Use the Approval Review Option

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use Approval Delegation


Introduction
You can transfer approval authority from one person to another. You might do this if a person leaves the company or takes an extended vacation. When you transfer approval authority, the system permanently changes all approval routes on which the person currently exists.

Procedure
To use the approval delegation option, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Purchasing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purchase

Order Processing screen appears.


4. Enter option 17, Approval Delegation, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Approval Delegation screen appears.

How to Use Approval Delegation

14-53

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the approver in the Approver field or press F1 to search for one.

6. Press Enter, then enter the employee number you are delegating authority to in the Assigned

To field.

14-54

How to Use Approval Delegation

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter.

To Review the Available Approvers and Approval Level Revisions


1. Enter 1 in the O column next to the desired line.

How to Use Approval Delegation

14-55

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Press Enter and the Approval Level Revisions screen appears.

3. Press F3 to exit the Approval Level Revisions screen.

To Delegate Approval Authority to Another Responsible Person


1. Enter 4 in the O column next to the desired line.

14-56

How to Use Approval Delegation

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Press Enter and Approval Delegation screen is cleared.

3. Press F3 to exit.

How to Use Approval Delegation

14-57

Exide Technologies, Inc.

14-58

How to Use Approval Delegation

Exide Technologies, Inc.

PARC Order Processing Module


How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS
Introduction
At the Exide customer location, a shipment is unpacked and matched to the packing slip. In some cases, the shipment and packing slip do not match. The shipment could be short a number of batteries, or the wrong type of battery was sent. Provided the corresponding DC has not reconciled its inventory recently, the Exide customer is issued a credit that puts the batteries back into inventory.

Procedure
To enter a shortage credit with inventory adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS

15-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The PARC Team Menu screen appears.

15-2

How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 3, Credit Shortage CS, on the command line.

How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS

15-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

15-4

How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press F6. The Credit Shortage CS screen appears.

7. Tab to the Order Date field, and enter the date of the original order. 8. Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter the ship to number:

IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown,

THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 11. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

9. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS 15-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
11. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 12. Tab to the Reference field, and perform the following steps to enter a reference number for

the customer: IF the distribution center Does not ship original equipment (OE), Does ship original equipment (OE), THEN Enter the customers original customer purchase order number, *, and the original order number in the Reference field. For Toyota USA: Enter the dock code, manifest, and card number without any separators. For Mercedes, Dept. 592: Enter the release number. For all other customers at a DC that ships original equipment (OE): Enter the customers purchase order number or Future III shipper number, if no purchase order is available.

13. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers

purchase order number: IF the order Does Not pertain to Volvo or Mack, Is Volvo OE, Is Mack OE, THEN enter An alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. The order number. The requisition number.

14. Tab to the Item field, and enter the appropriate customer type preceded by a decimal.

15-6

How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the required number of batteries as a negative number.

16. Tab to the O (Options) field, and if the customer is Original Equipment (OE) Mercedes,

then perform the following steps: a. Enter 2. b. Press Enter, and the Associated Text window appears.

c. Enter each ran# on a separate line. d. Press Enter. e. Press F3 to exit.

How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS

15-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

18. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter to accept the credit/shortage. 19. Continue to enter credits, or press F3 to exit.

15-8

How to Enter a Credit Shortage CS

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Credit Refused CR


Introduction
Refused credit is the data entry to give funds back to the customer for merchandise the customer will not accept on delivery. The customer may refuse all or part of a shipment.

Procedure
To enter a credit for refused products, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Credit Refused CR, on the command line.

How to Enter a Credit Refused CR

15-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

15-10

How to Enter a Credit Refused CR

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press F6. The Credit Refused CR screen appears.

6. Tab to the Order Date field, and enter the date of the original order. 7. Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter the ship to number for the

customer who returned the batteries: IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown, THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 10. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

How to Enter a Credit Refused CR

15-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


9. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
10. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 11. Tab to the Reference field, and perform the following steps to enter a reference number for a

customer: IF the distribution center Does not ship original equipment (OE), Does ship original equipment (OE), THEN Enter the customers original customer purchase order number, *, and the original order number. For Toyota USA: Enter the dock code, manifest, and card number without any separators. For Mercedes, Dept. 592: Enter the release number. For all other customers at a DC that ships original equipment (OE): Enter the customers purchase order number or Future III shipper number, if no purchase order is available.

12. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers

purchase order number: IF the order Does Not pertain to Volvo or Mack, Is Volvo OE, Is Mack OE, THEN enter An alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. The order number. The requisition number.

13. Tab to the Item field, and enter the appropriate customer type preceded by a decimal.

15-12

How to Enter a Credit Refused CR

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of items to be credited as a negative number.

15. Tab to the O (Options) field, and if the customer is Original Equipment (OE) Mercedes,

then perform the following steps: a. Enter 2. b. Press Enter, and the Associated Text window appears.

c. Enter each ran# on a separate line. d. Press Enter. e. Press F3 to exit.

How to Enter a Credit Refused CR

15-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 16. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

17. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. 18. Continue to enter credits, or press F3 to exit.

15-14

How to Enter a Credit Refused CR

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD


Introduction
Occasionally, the Exide customer receives batteries that are non-salable due to circumstances beyond Exides control. The batteries must be returned to the distribution center to enable the Exide customer to receive credit for the damaged batteries.

Procedure
To enter a damage credit, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Credit Damage CD, on the command line.

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD

15-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

15-16

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press F6. The Credit Damage CD screen appears.

6. Tab to the Order Date field, and enter the date of the original order. 7. Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter the ship to number for the

customer who returned the batteries: IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown, THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 10. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD

15-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


9. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
10. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 11. Tab to the Reference field, and perform the following steps to enter a reference number for a

customer: IF the distribution center Does not ship original equipment (OE), Does ship original equipment (OE), THEN Enter the customers original customer purchase order number, *, and the original order number. For Toyota USA: Enter the dock code, manifest, and card number without any separators. For Mercedes, Dept. 592: Enter the release number. For all other customers at a DC that ships original equipment (OE): Enter the customers purchase order number or Future III shipper number, if no purchase order is available.

12. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers

purchase order number:


13.

IF the order Does Not pertain to Volvo or Mack, Is Volvo OE, Is Mack OE,

THEN enter An alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. The order number. The requisition number.

14. Tab to the Item field, and enter the appropriate customer type preceded by a decimal.

15-18

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of batteries as a negative number.

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD

15-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 16. Tab to the LT (line type) field, and perform the following steps to identify the line types:

a. Enter CN on the line to give the customer credit. b. Enter CI on the last line to adjust the inventory. Note: Enter the batteries as 8900007.

17. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of batteries as a negative number.

18. Tab to the O (Options) field, and if the customer is Original Equipment (OE) Mercedes,

then perform the following steps: a. Enter 2. b. Press Enter, and the Associated Text window appears.

15-20

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD

Exide Technologies, Inc.

c. Enter each ran# on a separate line. d. Press Enter. e. Press F3 to exit.


19. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

20. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. 21. Continue to enter credits, or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD

15-21

Exide Technologies, Inc.

15-22

How to Enter a Credit Damage CD

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Credit Only CC


Introduction
The Exide customer calls to validate a credit that they should have received for Accounts Receivable as a disputed item. The credit is checked by Exide. The inventory at the corresponding distribution center has been reconciled. Due to the reconciliation of the inventory, the Exide customer is issued a credit for the batteries without inventory impact.

Procedure
To enter a credit, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Credit Only, on the command line.

How to Enter a Credit Only CC

15-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

5. Press F6. The Credit Only CC screen appears.

15-24

How to Enter a Credit Only CC

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. .Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter a credit only (CC):

IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown,

THEN enter The ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 9. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

7. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


8. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
9. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the ship to number selected. 10. Tab to the Reference field, and perform the following steps to enter a reference number for a

customer: IF the distribution center Does not ship original equipment (OE), Does ship original equipment (OE), THEN Enter the customers original customer purchase order number, *, and the original order number. For Toyota USA: Enter the dock code, manifest, and card number without any separators. For Mercedes, Dept. 592: Enter the release number. For all other customers at a DC that ships original equipment (OE): Enter the customers purchase order number or Future III shipper number, if no purchase order is available.

How to Enter a Credit Only CC

15-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers

purchase order number: IF the order Does Not pertain to Volvo or Mack, Is Volvo OE, Is Mack OE, THEN enter An alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. The order number. The requisition number.

12. Tab to the Item field, and enter the customer type preceded by a decimal. 13. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of batteries to be credited as a negative

number.

15-26

How to Enter a Credit Only CC

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Tab to the O (Options) field, and if the customer is Original Equipment (OE) Mercedes,

then perform the following steps: a. Enter 2. b. Press Enter, and the Associated Text window appears.

c. Enter each ran# on a separate line. d. Press Enter. e. Press F3 to exit.


15. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

16. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. 17. Continue to enter transfer orders, or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter a Credit Only CC

15-27

Exide Technologies, Inc.

15-28

How to Enter a Credit Only CC

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Credit Stocklift CL


Introduction
Sometimes, the Exide customer has batteries in their inventory that cannot be used. The batteries are removed from the Exide customers inventory and entered on a Delivery Exception Report (DER). The returned batteries are entered into the system once they have been received at the DC. The batteries will be tagged as blem.

Procedure
To enter a stocklift credit, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 16, Credit Stocklift CL, on the command line.

How to Enter a Credit Stocklift CL

15-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

5. Press F6. The Credit Stocklift CL screen appears.

15-30

How to Enter a Credit Stocklift CL

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter the number for the

customer who returned the batteries: IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown, THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 9. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

7. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


8. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
9. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number.

How to Enter a Credit Stocklift CL

15-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the Reference field, and enter the return authorization number.

11. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers

purchase order number: IF the order Does Not pertain to Volvo or Mack, Is Volvo OE, Is Mack OE, THEN enter An alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. The order number. The requisition number.

12. Tab to the Item field, and enter the customer type preceded by a decimal. 13. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of batteries to be credited as a negative

number.

15-32

How to Enter a Credit Stocklift CL

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Tab to the LT field, and perform the following steps to identify the line type:

a. Enter CN on the lines to give the customer credit. b. Enter CI on the last line to adjust the inventory. Note: Enter batteries as a blem, item number 8910460. Later, you can convert to the appropriate item number as a stock adjustment.

15. Tab to the O (Options) field, and if the customer is Original Equipment (OE) Mercedes,

then perform the following steps: a. Enter 2. b. Press Enter, and the Associated Text window appears.

How to Enter a Credit Stocklift CL

15-33

Exide Technologies, Inc.

c. Enter each ran# on a separate line. d. Press Enter. e. Press F3 to exit.


16. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

17. Press Enter to accept the credit. 18. Continue to enter credits, or press F3 to exit.

15-34

How to Enter a Credit Stocklift CL

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Credit Rotations CP


Introduction
The Exide customer has batteries in inventory that cannot be used. The batteries are removed from the Exide customers inventory and entered on a Delivery Exception Report (DER). The returned batteries are entered into the system once they have been received at the distribution center. The batteries will be tagged as blem.

Procedure
To enter a rotations credit, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 17, Credit Rotations CP, on the command line.

How to Enter a Credit Rotations CP

15-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

15-36

How to Enter a Credit Rotations CP

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press F6. The Credit Rotations CP screen appears.

6. Tab to the Ship To field, and enter the number for the customer who returned the batteries.

IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown,

THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field, and skip to Step 9. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

How to Enter a Credit Rotations CP

15-37

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


8. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
9. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 10. Tab to the Reference field, and enter a reference number for the customer. 11. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers

purchase order number: IF the order Does Not pertain to Volvo or Mack, Is Volvo OE, Is Mack OE, THEN enter An alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. The order number. The requisition number.

12. Tab to the Item field, and enter the appropriate customer type preceded by a decimal. 13. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the required number of batteries as a negative number. 14. Tab to the LT field, and perform the following steps to identify the line type:

a. Enter CN on the lines to credit the customer. b. Enter CI on the last line to adjust the inventory. Note: Enter batteries as a blem, 8910460. Later, convert to the appropriate item number as a stock adjustment.

15-38

How to Enter a Credit Rotations CP

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Tab to the O (Options) field, and if the customer is Original Equipment (OE) Mercedes,

then perform the following steps: a. Enter 2. b. Press Enter, and the Associated Text window appears.

c. Enter each ran# on a separate line. d. Press Enter. e. Press F3 to exit, and return to the Credit Rotations CP screen.
16. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

17. Press Enter. The data is saved. 18. Continue to enter credits, or press F3 to exit. How to Enter a Credit Rotations CP 15-39

Exide Technologies, Inc.

15-40

How to Enter a Credit Rotations CP

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Rotations CP


Introduction
Sometimes Kmart has batteries in inventory that cannot be used. The batteries are removed from Kmarts inventory and entered on a Delivery Exception Report (DER). The returned batteries are entered into the system once they have been received at the distribution center. The batteries will be tagged as blem.

Procedure
To enter a rotations credit, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 17, Credit Rotations CP, on the command line.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Rotations CP

15-41

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

15-42

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Rotations CP

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press F6. The Credit Rotations CP screen appears.

6. Tab to the Ship To field. 7. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

8. Enter the 3-digit department number (for example, 078) and the 4-digit store number (for

example, 3009) in the Alpha Name field.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Rotations CP

15-43

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter. The available customer locations appear.

Note:

In this example, the 3-digit department code and the 4-digit store code are represented in 0783009.

10. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field. Note: Notice that, for this example, the R in 078-3009R/K MART CORPORATION represents rotations. Here, you would select this Ship To to return blem batteries from Kmart. For a return from a Penske Ship To, you would select 0783009/PENSKE AUTO CENTERS.

11. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 12. Tab to the Reference field, and enter a reference number for the customer. 13. Tab to the Item field, and enter the appropriate customer type preceded by a decimal. 14. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the required number of batteries as a negative number.

15-44

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Rotations CP

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Tab to the LT field, and perform the following steps to identify the line type:

a. Enter CN on the lines to credit the customer. b. Enter CI on the last line to adjust the inventory.Note: Enter batteries as a blem, 8910460. Later, convert to the appropriate item number as a stock adjustment.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Rotations CP

15-45

Exide Technologies, Inc. 16. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

17. Press Enter. The data is saved. 18. Continue to enter credits, or press F3 to exit.

15-46

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Rotations CP

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ


Introduction
An Exide customer will give notification that a specified number of junk batteries need to be picked up from their location.

Procedure
To enter a credit for customer junks, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 18, Credit Customer Junks CJ, on the command line.

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ

15-47

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

15-48

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press F6. The Credit Customer Junks CJ screen appears.

6. Tab to the Order Date field, and enter the date that the batteries were picked up from the

junk ticket.
7. Tab to the Ship To field, and enter the number for the customer who returned the batteries.

IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown,

THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field, and skip to Step 10. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ

15-49

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


9. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
10. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 11. Tab to the Reference field, and enter the junk ticket number. 12. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers

purchase order number: IF the order Does Not pertain to Volvo or Mack, Is Volvo OE, Is Mack OE, THEN enter An alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. The order number. The requisition number.

13. Press F5. The Available Templates screen appears.

15-50

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Press Enter. The Junk Template option appears on the Available Templates screen.

Note:

Ensure that the Address Number field is blank before you press Enter.

15. Enter 4 in the O field (option) beside the JUNK template. 16. Press Enter. The Order Template screen for junk appears.

Note:

Press F4 to view additional data for the junk items.

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ

15-51

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the quantity of the junk item as a negative number.

18. Press Enter. The quantity is accepted.

Note:

Do not enter the quantities again.

19. Press F3 to exit the Order Template screen. The Credit Customer Junks CJ screen

appears and displays the selected item number and quantity.

15-52

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ

Exide Technologies, Inc. 20. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

21. Press Enter to accept the data. 22. Continue to enter junks for pick up, or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ

15-53

Exide Technologies, Inc.

15-54

How to Enter a Credit Customer Junks CJ

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ


Introduction
On occasion, Kmart will give notification that a specified number of junk batteries need to be picked up from a Kmart location.

Procedure
To enter a credit for (Kmart) customer junks, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 18, Credit Customer Junks CJ, on the command line.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ

15-55

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. A caution message appears reminding you to enter a negative number for the

credits.

15-56

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press F6. The Credit Customer Junks CJ screen appears.

6. Tab to the Order Date field, and enter the date that the batteries were picked up from the

junk ticket.
7. Tab to the Ship To field. 8. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

9. Enter the 3-digit department number (for example, 078) and the 4-digit store number (for

example, 3009) in the Alpha Name field.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ

15-57

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The available customer locations appear.

Note:

In this example, the 3-digit department code and the 4-digit store code are represented in 0783009.

11. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field. Note: Notice that, for this example, the J in 078-3009J/K MART CORPORATION represents customer junks. In this example, you would select this Ship To to receive junk battery returns from Kmart. For a junk return from a Penske Ship To, you would select 078-3009/PENSKE AUTO CENTERS.

12. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 13. Tab to the Reference field, and enter the junk ticket number. 14. Press F5. The Available Templates screen appears.

15-58

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press Enter. The Junk Template option appears on the Available Templates screen.

Note:

Ensure that the Address Number field is blank before you press Enter.

16. Enter 4 in the O field (option) beside the JUNK template. 17. Press Enter. The Order Template screen for junk appears.

Note:

Press F4 to view additional data for the junk items.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ

15-59

Exide Technologies, Inc. 18. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the quantity of the junk item as a negative number.

19. Press Enter. The quantity is accepted.

Note:

Do not enter the quantities again.

20. Press F3 to exit the Order Template screen. The Credit Customer Junks CJ screen

appears and displays the selected item number and quantity.

15-60

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ

Exide Technologies, Inc. 21. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

22. Press Enter to accept the data. 23. Continue to enter junks for pick up, or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter a Kmart Credit Customer Junks CJ

15-61

Exide Technologies, Inc.

15-62

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Confirm Credits


Introduction
Use the confirm credit function to verify that a customer received credit for returned batteries. This function also receives the returned batteries back into inventory.

Procedure
To confirm credits, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 11, Confirm Credit, on the command line.

15-63How to Confirm CreditsHow to Confirm Credits

How to Confirm CreditsHow to Confirm Credits

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Receiving Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter the return order number in the Order# field.

15-64

How to Confirm Credits

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The data for the return appears.

Note:

If the quantity for the credit was not entered as a negative number in order processing, a message stating the number was entered as a positive quantity appears.

How to Confirm Credits

15-65

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press F5 to receive the customer return into inventory. The screen now displays with nothing

in the Quantity To Receive field because the items have been received. The status bumps to 580.

8. Press F3 to exit.

15-66

How to Confirm Credits

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG


Introduction
A customer may need to place an order to re-supply their inventory. The distribution center will be, in some instances, required to enter the order and get the merchandise to the customer promptly or process an over shipment.

Procedure
To enter a customer sales order for PARC, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Order Processing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The PARC Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry Menu screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

The PARC,

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

15-67

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 2, Customer Sales Orders, on the command line.

15-68

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Customer Sales Order SG screen appears.

6. Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter the ship to number:

IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown,

THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 9. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

15-69

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code in the Alpha Name field, and press Enter. The

available customer locations appear.


8. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
9. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 10. Tab to the Requested field, and enter the customers requested delivery date. 11. Tab to the Reference field, and perform the following steps to enter the customers purchase

order number: IF the customer Is not Toyota USA or Mercedes, Dept. 592, THEN enter The customers purchase order number, or, if there is no purchase order number, the Future III Shipper number, in the Reference field. The dock code, manifest, and card number without any separators. The release number.

Is Toyota USA, Is Mercedes, Dept. 592, Note:

Any alpha characters contained in the purchase order number must be uppercase.

12. Tab to the Customer# field, and perform the following steps to enter an alternate customer

number, if necessary: IF the customer sales order Is a Future III customer, Is Volvo OE and Mack OE, THEN enter An alternate customer number or Future III shipper number, if applicable. The Ordno for Volvo, or the Req. # for Mack, not the PO#.

15-70

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Tab to the Item field, and enter the appropriate customer type preceded by a decimal.

14. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the quantity ordered. 15. Tab to the O (Options) field, and if the customer is Original Equipment (OE) Mercedes,

then perform the following steps: a. Enter 2. b. Press Enter, and the Associated Text window appears. c. Enter each ran# on a separate line. d. Press Enter. e. Press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

15-71

Exide Technologies, Inc. 16. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

17. Press N in the prompt to NOT accept the order, then press Enter.

15-72

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc. 18. Press F15, and the Order Heading Information screen appears.

19. Tab to the Ordered By field, and enter the customer name. 20. Press Enter twice, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears. 21. Enter Y in the prompt to accept the order, then press Enter. You have now entered a

customer sales order.


22. Continue to enter orders, or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

15-73

Exide Technologies, Inc.

15-74

How to Enter Customer Sales Orders SG

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter Employee/Casual Sales SX


Introduction
This function allows you to place an order for a sale to an employee or to enter a casual sale.

Procedure
To enter an order for an employee, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 19, Order Processing Menu on the command line.

How to Enter Employee/Casual Sales SX

15-75

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

5. Enter option 3, Employee/Casual SX, on the command line.

15-76

How to Enter Employee/Casual Sales SX

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Employee/Casual Sales SX screen appears.

7. Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter the casual sales or

employee sales customer number: IF the ship to number is Known, Unknown, THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 10. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

How to Enter Employee/Casual Sales SX

15-77

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Type the appropriate 3-digit department code of 402 ES (employee sale) or CS (casual sale),

and the 3-digit business unit in the Alpha Name field.


9. Press Enter. The available customer locations appear.

10. Locate the appropriate customer location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
11. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number.

12. Tab to the Requested field, and enter the customers requested delivery date. 13. Tab to the Reference field, and enter the current month and year. 14. Tab to the Item field, and enter the blem or finished battery number. 15-78 How to Enter Employee/Casual Sales SX

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the required number of batteries.

How to Enter Employee/Casual Sales SX

15-79

Exide Technologies, Inc. 16. Press Enter, and the Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

17. Type Y to accept the order, and then press Enter. 18. Continue to enter orders, or press F3 to exit.

15-80

How to Enter Employee/Casual Sales SX

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO


Introduction
Currently the Exide locations are in the process of being converted to the JD Edwards systems. If an order ships to a non-JDE Exide location, enter it as an EO document type.

Procedure
To enter orders to Exide non-JDE EO, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 19, PARC Order Processing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Orders to Exide Non JDE EO, on the command line.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO

15-81

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Orders to Exide Non JDE EO screen appears.

6. Tab to the Ship To field, and press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

15-82

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Type Exide and the non-JDE location name in the Alpha Name field, for example, Exide

Reading.

8. Tab to the Search Type field, and type L. 9. Press Enter to select the location from a list.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO

15-83

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the appropriate location, and type 4 (Select) in the O (option) field. 11. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship-to number.

15-84

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Tab to the Requested field, and enter the date of the requested delivery. 13. Press Enter to accept the data.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO

15-85

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Press Enter. The Sales Order Entry screen appears.

15. Tab to Item field, and enter the basic battery number or the finished battery number. 16. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the quantity ordered.

15-86

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Press Enter. The message Enter Y to record order appears.

18. Type Y to accept the order, and then press Enter. 19. Continue to enter orders, or press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO

15-87

Exide Technologies, Inc.

15-88

How to Enter Orders to Exide Non-JDE EO

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter Junk Shipments to Smelter SI


Introduction
This function allows you to transfer batteries to the smelter. A conversion to pounds should occur prior to entering a transfer to the smelter.

Procedure
To enter a transfer order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 19, Order Processing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.


4. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter.

How to Enter Junk Shipments to Smelter SI

15-89

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 5, Junk Shipments to Smelter SI, on the command line.

15-90

How to Enter Junk Shipments to Smelter SI

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter, and the Junk Shipments to Smelter SI screen appears.

7. Tab to the Ship To field, and perform the following steps to enter the smelter location:

IF the ship to location is Known, Unknown,

THEN Enter the ship to number in the Ship To field. Skip to Step 12. Press F1 to access the Name Search screen.

8. Type the appropriate smelter location in the Alpha Name field. 9. Tab to the Search Type field, and enter an L.

How to Enter Junk Shipments to Smelter SI

15-91

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The available locations matching the search criteria appear. 11. Locate the appropriate smelter location from the list, and enter 4 (Select) in the O (option)

field.
12. Press Enter, and the Ship To field automatically populates with the correct ship to number. 13. Tab to the Reference field, and enter the weight ticket number. 14. Tab to the Delivery Instr field, and enter the trailer number for the items. 15. Press Enter twice, and the Sales Order Entry detail screen appears.

16. Tab to the Item field, and perform the following step to enter the item going to the smelter:

IF the items are Batteries, Wheel weights,

THEN enter 10201. 10404.

15-92

How to Enter Junk Shipments to Smelter SI

Exide Technologies, Inc. 17. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of pounds to transfer to the smelter.

Note:

A conversion to pounds should have occurred prior to the entry of transfers.

How to Enter Junk Shipments to Smelter SI

15-93

Exide Technologies, Inc. 18. Press Enter. The Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

19. Press Enter. The transfer order is accepted. 20. Continue to enter transfer orders, or press F3 to exit.

15-94

How to Enter Junk Shipments to Smelter SI

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Enter Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT


Introduction
A transfer order is an interplant inventory transfer of stock between two JD Edwards locations.

Procedure
To enter a transfer order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry Menu screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

The PARC,

4. Enter option 6, Transfer to JDE DC, on the command line.

How to Enter Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT

15-95

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT screen appears.

6. Tab to the Ship Frm Brn field, and enter the branch/plant shipping the order. 7. Tab to the Ship To Brn field, and enter the branch/plant receiving the order. 8. Tab to the Item Number field, and enter the item(s) to transfer.

15-96

How to Enter Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Quantity field, and enter the number of items to transfer.

How to Enter Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT

15-97

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Enter Y to Record Order prompt appears.

11. Press Enter. The transfer order is accepted. 12. Continue to enter transfer orders, or press F3 to exit.

15-98

How to Enter Transfer to JDE DC ST/OT

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Assign a Pick Number


Introduction
After entering an order, you must then assign a pick number to the order.

Procedure
To assign a pick number, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry Menu screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Assign a Pick Number

15-99

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 8, Assign Pick Number, on the command line.

6. Press Enter. The Assign Pick Number screen appears.

15-100

How to Assign a Pick Number

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the Order Number row, and enter the appropriate value from the following table in

the Value column: TO assign a pick number to A single order or list of orders, THEN type *VALUE in the Value column. Press Enter twice, and the Values for : Order Number screen appears. Enter the order number(s) to be assigned a pick number. *ALL in the Value column. Press Enter. The Values for : Order Type screen appears.

All orders,

8. Press Enter twice, and the message Assign Pick Number submitted to batch appears.

How to Assign a Pick Number

15-101

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Type 33 on the command line.

15-102

How to Assign a Pick Number

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter, and the Work with Submitted Jobs screen appears.

11. Verify that the job has a status of OUTQ. 12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Assign a Pick Number

15-103

Exide Technologies, Inc.

15-104

How to Assign a Pick Number

Exide Technologies, Inc.

PARC Truck Routing Module


How to Manually Route an Order
Introduction
An order may need to be manually routed when assigning it to a trip.

Procedure
To manually route an order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Manually Route an Order

16-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The PARC Team Menu screen appears.

16-2

How to Manually Route an Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry Menu screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

5. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

6. Enter option 14, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip-Assignment - Trip Build screen appears.

How to Manually Route an Order

16-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press F6 to assign a new trip number. The Trip Number field displays a trip number

generated by the system.

16-4

How to Manually Route an Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the Trp Seq field and enter the sequence for the trip. 9. Tab to the Pick Number field and enter the pick number.

10. Press Enter.

How to Manually Route an Order

16-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. If you know the carrier, trailer, or door information, press F8 to display the Trip Master

Maintenance screen.

12. Tab to the Carrier Nbr field. The default entry is the Exide carrier. Press F1 to select a

third-party carrier.
13. Tab to the Description field and enter a brief description for the trip. 14. Tab to the Trailer Number and enter the trailer number on which the batteries will be

loaded.

16-6

How to Manually Route an Order

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Tab to the Door Nbr field and enter the door number from which the trip will be placed.

16. Tab to the Seal Number field and enter the seal number on the truck. 17. Tab to the Driver Name field and enter the name of the truck driver.

How to Manually Route an Order

16-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 18. Tab to the Scheduled Departure field and enter the date the shipment will leave the

distribution center.

19. Press Enter. The Trip Assignment - Trip Build screen reappears. 20. Enter additional trips or press F3 to exit.

16-8

How to Manually Route an Order

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip


Introduction
Occasionally after a trip has been created, a new pick number may need to be added.

Procedure
To manually add a pick number to an existing trip, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center, The PARC,

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip

16-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 14, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip-Assignment - Trip Build screen appears.

16-10

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter the appropriate trip number in the Trip Number field, then press Enter. The trip

appears on the screen.

7. Tab to the next available field in the Trp Seq column and enter the sequence number for the

pick to be added.
8. Tab to the Pick Number column and enter the pick number to be added to the trip.

Note:

If the pick number to be added belongs to an existing ship to on the trip, enter the same sequence number so that all of the information prints on one Bill of Lading.

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip

16-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter to accept the pick.

10. Continue to add new pick numbers to the trip or press F3 to exit.

16-12

How to Manually Add to an Existing Trip

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Manually Remove a Pick from a Trip


Introduction
A routed order may need to be manually removed from a trip.

Procedure
To manually remove a routed order, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center, The PARC,

How to Manually Remove a Pick from a Trip

16-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 14, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip-Assignment - Trip Build screen appears.


6. Enter the appropriate trip number in the Trip Number field, and then press Enter. The trip

appears on the screen.

7. Enter a 9 in the OP column by the sequence to be removed, and then press Enter. The

sequence is removed from the trip.


8. Remove additional routed orders or press F3 to exit.

16-14

How to Manually Remove a Pick from a Trip

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip


Introduction
Orders on a trip may need to be manually re-sequenced on a truck prior to shipment.

Procedure
To manually re-sequence orders, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip

16-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 14, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip-Assignment - Trip Build screen appears.

6. Enter the appropriate trip number in the Trip Number field, and then press Enter. The trip

appears.

16-16

How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to Trp Seq column for the first pick number to re-sequence. Enter the new sequence

number.
8. Continue to manually re-sequence the orders on a trip. When finished, press Enter to accept

the changes.

9. Continue to re-sequence orders or press F3 to quit.

How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip

16-17

Exide Technologies, Inc.

16-18

How to Manually Re-sequence Orders on a Trip

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Trip Master Inquiry screen allows you to assign carriers, designated doors, and other data to trips leaving a distribution center.

Procedure
To use the Trip Master Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry Menu screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

16-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 15, Trip Master Inquiry, on the command line.

6. Press Enter. The Trip Master Inquiry screen appears.

16-20

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Perform one of the following steps:

IF the trip number You want to edit or display appears on the screen, You want to edit or display is not displayed on the screen,

THEN Skip to Step 9. Enter the desired trip number in the Position To field and press Enter. The Trip Master Inquiry screen appears with the selected trip number at the top of the list. THEN Type 5. Press Enter. The Trip Master Maintenance screen appears displaying the trip data. Skip to Step 9. Type 2. Press Enter. The Trip Master Maintenance screen appears displaying the trip data.

8. Tab to the appropriate OP field (option), and perform one of the following steps:

IF you want to Display trip data,

Edit trip data,

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

16-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Change or add information as needed.

Note:

Not all fields can be changed.

10. Press Enter. The changes are saved. 11. Press F3 to return to the Trip Master Inquiry screen. 12. Select another trip number for display or editing, or press F3 to return to the DC Routing

Menu screen.

16-22

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment - Trip Build Screen
Introduction
The Trip Assignment - Trip Build screen enables you to inquire on information about trips and print pick tickets to give to the floor for order fulfillment.

Procedure
To utilize the Trip Master Maintenance screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press Enter. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment - Trip Build Screen

16-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 14, Trip Assignment - Trip Build, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Trip Assignment - Trip Build screen appears.

16-24

How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment - Trip Build Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field, then press Enter. The trip information

appears.

7. Press F5 to print all the pick tickets associated with the trip.

Note:

To print a specific pick ticket, tab to the OP field next to the pick number to be printed and type 1. Then press F5 to print the pick ticket.

8. Press F3 to exit.

How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment - Trip Build Screen

16-25

Exide Technologies, Inc.

16-26

How to Print Pick Tickets from the Trip Assignment - Trip Build Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen


Introduction
The Trip Master Maintenance screen allows you to select a carrier and designate a door, among other functions, for trips leaving a distribution center.

Procedure
To utilize the Trip Master Maintenance screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press Enter. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

5. Enter option 16, Trip Master Maintenance, on the command line.

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen

16-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Trip Master Maintenance screen appears.

7. Enter the trip number in the Trip Nbr field, then press Enter. The trip information appears.

16-28

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Enter information in the appropriate fields. The following fields are required:

Field Carrier Nbr Door Nbr Scheduled Departure Note:

Description Defaults to the Exide carrier but can be changed to a thirdparty carrier by pressing F1. Must be entered prior to truck loading. Can be utilized to keep track of trips shipping on schedule.

The other fields are not required, although they may help you better track the trip.

9. Press Enter to accept the data. 10. Enter additional trips or press F3 to exit.

How to Manually Route an Order

16-29

Exide Technologies, Inc.

16-30

How to Use the Trip Master Maintenance Screen

PARC Order Fulfillment Module


How to Perform Pick Verification
Introduction
The Pick Verification function allows you to perform several tasks: Pick verify pre-finished batteries Pick verify an order for order fulfillment Partial-pick an order when there is not enough inventory Create a new serial number while picking an order Pack confirm an order

Procedure
To perform pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Perform Pick Verification

17-1

2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The PARC Team Menu screen appears.

17-2

How to Perform Pick Verification

4. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch/plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

5. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch/plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

6. Enter option 18, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Pick

Verification Entry screen appears.

How to Perform Pick Verification

17-3

7. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field. 8. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

17-4

How to Perform Pick Verification

9. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1, then press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty

Updates screen appears.

10. Tab to the Qty Picked field that corresponds to the appropriate GNB Type field, and enter

the quantity of batteries to pick for that type.

How to Perform Pick Verification

17-5

11. Press Enter. The quantity on hand (Qty On Hand field) decreases and the quantity picked

(Qty Picked field) increases.

12. Press F2 to close the pallet and print the pallet tags. 13. Press F3 twice to exit.

17-6

How to Perform Pick Verification

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification


Introduction
On occasion, you might want to add batteries to a pallet using the pick verification function.

Procedure
To add to a pallet in pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch/plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch/plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

17-7

5. Enter option 18, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Pick

Verification Entry screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

17-8

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

7. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

8. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1 beside the order you are adding to.

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

17-9

9. Press F6. The Pallet Inquiry screen appears.

10. Enter 4 in the Sel field next to the pallet number that will receive the batteries.

17-10

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

11. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

Note:

The pallet number displays in the Pallet Number field.

12. Tab to the Sel field corresponding to the pick number, and enter 1.

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

17-11

13. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears.

14. Tab to the Qty Picked field for the desired customer type, and enter the number of batteries

to add.

17-12

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

15. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen updates by decreasing the quantity

to pick, updating the total picked, and the batteries are added. (See line 4.)

16. Press F2 to close the pallet and print a new barcode. 17. Press F3 to exit the screen.

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

17-13

17-14

How to Add to a Pallet in Pick Verification

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification


Introduction
Use this function to unpick batteries when an order of batteries is picked.

Procedure
To unpick batteries in pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch/plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch/plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

17-15

5. Enter option 18, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Pick

Verification Entry screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

17-16

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

7. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

8. Tab to the desired Sel field, and enter 1 beside the order you want to unpick.

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

17-17

9. Press F6. The Pallet Inquiry screen appears.

10. Enter 4 in the Sel field next to the pallet number from which you are unpicking batteries.

17-18

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

11. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears.

Note:

The pallet number appears in the Pallet Number field.

12. Tab to the Sel field corresponding to the pick number for which you are unpicking batteries,

and enter 1.

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

17-19

13. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears.

14. Tab to the Qty Picked field for the desired customer type, and enter a negative number of

batteries to unpick.

17-20

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

15. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears with the unpicked quantity

of batteries subtracted from the Total Picked field.

16. Press F2 to close the pallet and print a new barcode only if other batteries still exist on the

pallet.
17. Press F3 to exit the screen.

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

17-21

17-22

How to Unpick Batteries in Pick Verification

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification


Introduction
When a user packs an order in pick verification, the pick is closed. The user can no longer unpick pallets. Also, the status changes to 560 (Ship Confirm) and the packing slip prints once the pick is closed.

Procedure
To pack an order in pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch/plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch/plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

17-23

5. Enter option 18, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Pick

Verification Entry screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

17-24

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

7. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

8. Tab to the desired Sel field, and enter 1 beside the order to be packed.

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

17-25

9. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Qty Updates screen appears.

17-26

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

10. Press F6 to pack the order. The message Press F6 to Accept Pack Confirm appears.

Note:

If this is a partial pick, the message Backorders/Cancel exists, F15 to Pack appears.

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

17-27

11. Perform the following steps to finish packing the order, if necessary:

IF All lines of the order are picked, The order has been partially picked, Note:

THEN Press F6 again to pack confirm the order. Press F15 to pack confirm a partial pick.

If you accidentally pressed F6 and you do not want to backorder, press Enter and then press F3 to exit.

Note:

The status of the order changes from 545 (Pick Confirm) to 560 (Shipment Confirm). The status code appears in the Status field and a packing slip is generated.

12. Press F3 twice to exit.

17-28

How to Pack (Close) an Order in Pick Verification

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification


Procedure
To print a packing slip in pick verification, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch/plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch/plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification

17-29

5. Enter option 18, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Pick

Verification Entry screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

17-30

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification

7. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

8. Tab to the desired Sel field and enter 1 beside the order to be picked. 9. Press F5 to print the packing slip. 10. The packing slip prints on the default printer. 11. Press F3 twice to exit.

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification

17-31

17-32

How to Print a Packing Slip in Pick Verification

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification


Introduction
Use this process to reprint a pallet label using pick verification.

Procedure
To reprint pallet labels, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch/plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch/plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

17-33

5. Enter option 18, Pick Verification Entry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Pick

Verification Entry screen appears.

6. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

17-34

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

7. Press Enter. The pick verification data for the selected trip number appears on the screen.

8. Tab to the desired Sel field, and enter 1 in the field that corresponds to the desired pick

number.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

17-35

9. Press F6. The Pallet Inquiry screen appears.

10. Enter 4 in the Sel field next to the pallet for which you are reprinting the label.

17-36

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

11. Press Enter. The Pick Verification Entry screen appears. The pallet number displays in the

Pallet Number field.

12. Press F2 to print the pallet label on the default printer. 13. Press F3 twice to exit.

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

17-37

17-38

How to Reprint a Pallet Label in Pick Verification

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance


Introduction
Perform a pallet adjustment when you need to move batteries from one pallet to another.

Procedure
To use picked pallet maintenance, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, OVERAGES Order Entry, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Overage Order Entry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 19, Picked Pallet Maintenance, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Picked Pallet Maintenance screen appears.

5. Enter the pallet number from which the batteries are being moved in the From Pallet Serial

# field.

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

17-39

6. Tab to the To Pallet Serial # field, and perform the following steps as necessary:

IF you want to move batteries From an existing pallet to a new pallet, From one existing pallet to another existing pallet within the same pick,

THEN Skip to Step 11. Enter the pallet number that is receiving the batteries.

17-40

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

7. Press Enter. Pallet data appears on the Picked Pallet Maintenance screen.

8. Enter the quantity (of each customer type) to be moved in the appropriate Quantity field, and

press F5. The screen appears with the Press F5 to Confirm Pallet Move prompt.

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

17-41

9. Press F5 to confirm the pallet move. The quantity in the From Quantity field reflects the

change.

10. Skip to Step 14.

17-42

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

11. Press Enter. Pallet data appears on the Picked Pallet Maintenance screen.

12. Enter the quantity (of each customer type) to be moved in the corresponding Quantity field,

and press F6. The screen appears with the Press F6 to Confirm Pallet Move.

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

17-43

13. Press F6. The screen appears with the Last Serial Number Created. message and identifies

the serial number created.

14. Press F3 to exit the Picked Pallet Maintenance screen.

17-44

How to Use Picked Pallet Maintenance

PARC Truck Loading Through Confirm Shipment Module


How to Perform Truck Loading
Introduction
A PARC user loading a truck will need to view completed orders and sequence numbers, assign trip numbers to loading docks, and modify trip information.

Procedure
To truckload for PARC, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Perform Truck Loading

18-1

2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The PARC Team Menu screen appears.

18-2

How to Perform Truck Loading

4. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press Enter. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

5. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

6. Enter option 20, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.

How to Perform Truck Loading

18-3

7. Enter option 1, Truck Loading, on the command line.

8. Press Enter. The Truck Loading screen appears.

18-4

How to Perform Truck Loading

9. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

10. Press Enter. The trip data appears.

How to Perform Truck Loading

18-5

11. Scan/enter the serial number on the barcode of the pallet to be loaded onto the truck or rail

car. The serial number appears in the Serial# field. Note: You must type an S before the serial number if entering it manually.

12. Scan/enter the door number where the pallet will be loaded in the truck. The door number

appears in the Door field.

18-6

How to Perform Truck Loading

After the door number is entered, the screen updates and displays the message PALLET _____ LOADED TO TRIP.

13. Continue to load the truck or press F3 to exit.

How to Perform Truck Loading

18-7

18-8

How to Perform Truck Loading

How to Un-Truck Load


Introduction
If ever you need to remove a trip from a truck, you must enter the trip number, serial number, and door number into the system.

Procedure
To un-truck a load, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Un-Truck Load

18-9

5. Enter option 20, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.

18-10

How to Un-Truck Load

6. Enter option 1, Truck Loading, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Truck Loading screen appears.

How to Un-Truck Load

18-11

8. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

Note:

If all loaded, no data appears.

9. Press Enter. The trip data appears.

18-12

How to Un-Truck Load

10. Scan/enter the serial number on the barcode of the pallet to be removed from the truck or rail

car. The serial number appears in the Serial# field. Note: You must type an S before the serial number if entering it manually.

11. Scan/enter the door number from which the pallet will be removed. The door number appears

in the Door field.

How to Un-Truck Load

18-13

After the door number is entered, the screen updates and displays the message PALLET _____ REMOVED FROM TRIP.

12. Continue to unload the truck or press F3 to exit.

18-14

How to Un-Truck Load

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)


Introduction
Load completing a trip is the process of printing shipping documents that consist of the Bill of Lading and Manifest for the trip.

Procedure
To load complete a trip, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

18-15

5. Enter option 20, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.

18-16

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

6. Enter option 2, Load Completion, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Load Completion screen appears.

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

18-17

8. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

9. Press Enter. The trip data appears.

18-18

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

10. Verify the information, then press F7 to print shipping documents. The Load Completion

screen displays the message SHIPPING DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN PRINTED.

11. Continue to load complete or press F3 to exit.

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

18-19

18-20

How to Perform Load Completion (Print Shipping Documents)

How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)


Introduction
Trips must be ship confirmed after they have been load completed in order to relieve inventory and update the order statuses to create the invoices. Ship confirming a trip enables: Component inventory to be decreased Item Ledger to be updated On-hand and availability quantities to be changed on the summary availability Stock locator to be updated

Procedure
To confirm a trip, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)

18-21

5. Enter option 20, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.

18-22

How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)

6. Enter option 3, Confirm Shipment, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Confirm Shipment screen appears.

How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)

18-23

8. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field.

9. Press Enter. The trip data appears.

10. Verify the information, then press F5 to confirm the shipment. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.
11. Continue to confirm shipments or press F3 to exit. 18-24 How to Perform Confirm Shipment (Relieve Inventory)

How to Reprint Documents


Introduction
Reprinting shipping documents enables the printing of the Bill of Lading and Manifest for the trip that has been shipped.

Procedure
To reprint shipping documents, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Perform the following steps to validate that action is taken against the correct branch plant:

a. Type 80 on the command line. b. Press Enter. The Maintain Default Location screen appears. c. Perform the following steps: IF the branch/plant is Correct, Incorrect, THEN Press Enter. Enter the correct branch/plant in the Branch/Plant field, and press Enter. THEN type 7, and press Enter. Read the caution message, then press F6 to continue. The Overage Order Entry screen appears. 19, and press Enter. The PARC Order Processing Menu screen appears.

4. Enter the appropriate option, based on the appropriate branch plant, on the command line.

IF you wish to act against The distribution center,

The PARC,

How to Reprint Documents

18-25

5. Enter option 20, Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Shipping Menu

screen appears.

18-26

How to Reprint Documents

6. Enter option 4, Reprint Documents, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Shipping screen appears.

How to Reprint Documents

18-27

8. Enter the trip number in the Trip Number field, then press Enter. The trip selected appears

at the top of the list.

9. Enter 8 in the OP field next to the documents to be reprinted, then press Enter. The Bill of

Lading and Manifest print to the users default printer.


10. Continue to reprint shipping documents or press F3 to exit.

18-28

How to Reprint Documents

Exide Technologies, Inc.

PARC Stock Adjustments Module


How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)
Introduction
A Type to Type stock adjustment is the process of converting one battery type to another battery type within the PARC center.

Procedure
To perform a type to type adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

19-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The PARC Team Menu screen appears.

19-2

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

4. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

19-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter N in the Reason Code field.

7. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

19-4

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

8. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

9. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting.

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

19-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

19-6

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

11. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination.

12. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 13. Press Enter. 14. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

19-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-8

How to Perform a Type to Type Adjustment (N)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)


Introduction
An Inventory to Corporate Junk adjustment is the process of converting one battery type to a junk battery type within the PARC center.

Procedure
To perform an inventory to corporate junk adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

19-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter J in the Reason Code field.

19-10

How to Perform a Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

How to Perform a Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

19-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

19-12

How to Perform a Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

19-13

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-14

How to Perform a Corporate Junk Adjustment (J)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)


Introduction
An Inventory to Junk stock adjustment is the process of converting one battery type to a junk battery type within the PARC center.

Procedure
To perform an inventory to junk adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

19-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

19-16

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

5. Enter E in the Reason Code field.

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

19-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting.

19-18

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

19-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

19-20

How to Perform an Inventory to Junk Adjustment (E)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)


Introduction
A Recovery from Junk stock adjustment is the process of converting from a junk battery type to another battery type within the PARC center.

Procedure
To perform a recover from junk adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

19-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter K in the Reason Code field.

19-22

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

6.

Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Enter the current junk type in the From Type field.

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

19-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

19-24

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

19-25

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-26

How to Perform a Recover from Junk Adjustment (K)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)


Introduction
An Inventory to Blem stock adjustment is the process of converting one battery type to a blem battery type within the PARC center.

Procedure
To perform an inventory to blem adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

19-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter H in the Reason Code field.

19-28

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

6.

Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

19-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

19-30

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

10. Tab to the To Type field and enter 8910460 (blem).

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

19-31

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-32

How to Perform an Inventory to Blem Adjustment (H)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Recover from Blem (P)


Introduction
A Recover from Blem stock adjustment is the process of converting from a blem battery type to another battery type within the PARC center.

Procedure
To perform a recover from blem, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a Recover from Blem (P)

19-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry appears.

5. Enter P in the Reason Code field.

19-34

How to Perform a Recover from Blem (P)

6. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

How to Perform a Recover from Blem (P)

19-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

19-36

How to Perform a Recover from Blem (P)

10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Recover from Blem (P)

19-37

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-38

How to Perform a Recover from Blem (P)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)


Introduction
A Cycle Count (CC) stock adjustment is the process of adjusting the on-hand quantity of a battery type in a location within the PARC center.

Procedure
To perform a cycle count conversion, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

19-39

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter CC in the Reason Code field.

19-40

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

6. Press Enter, and the Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

19-41

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the battery type in the Type field.

8. Tab to the Loc field and enter the location.

19-42

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

9. Enter the number of on-hand batteries in the New Balance field.

10. Press Enter. 11. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

19-43

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-44

How to Perform a Cycle Count Conversion (CC)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)


Introduction
A receipt of Warranty Batteries stock adjustment is the process of receiving warranty batteries into a facility.

Procedure
To perform a WIP receipt adjustment (WR), perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)

19-45

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter a WR (BAF WIP PARC Receipt) type of adjustment in the Reason Code field.

19-46

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)

6.

Press Enter, and the Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Leave the default type (8900017) in the To Type field. 8. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting.

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)

19-47

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

10. Press Enter. 11. Press F3 to exit.

19-48

How to Perform a WIP Receipt Adjustment (WR)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)


Introduction
A stock adjustment from Warranty Batteries (WIP) is the process of converting WIP (work in process) batteries to another battery type in a facility.

Procedure
To convert WIP batteries to another battery type, perform the followings steps:

Procedure
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

19-49

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter a WF (From BAF WIP PARC) type of adjustment in the Reason Code field.

19-50

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

6. Press Enter, and the Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Leave the current type in the From Type field. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting.

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

19-51

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

19-52

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Conversion from WIP (WF)

19-53

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-54

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)


Introduction
A Blem Batteries stock adjustment is the process of converting Blem batteries to another type in a facility.

Procedure
To perform a conversion from Blem, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

19-55

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter a BF (From PARC Blem) type of adjustment in the Reason Code field.

19-56

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

6. Press Enter, and the Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Enter 8910460 in the From Type field.

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

19-57

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

19-58

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

19-59

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-60

How to Perform a Conversion from Blem (BF)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)


Introduction
A stock adjustment from junk batteries is the process of converting junk batteries to another battery type in a facility.

Procedure
To perform a type to type adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

19-61

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter a JF (From PARC Junk) type of adjustment in the Reason Code field.

19-62

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

6. Press Enter, and the Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Enter the current type in the From Type field.

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

19-63

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

19-64

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

19-65

Exide Technologies, Inc.

19-66

How to Perform a Conversion from Junk (JF)

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)


Introduction
This stock adjustment is used to convert junk batteries for a shipment to a smelter.

Procedure
To perform a conversion of junk EAs to LBs, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 15, Operations-Adjustments, on the command line.

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

19-67

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

5. Enter a JW (From PARC Junk) type of adjustment in the Reason Code field.

19-68

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

6. Press Enter, and the Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen refreshes.

7. Enter the current type in From Type field.

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

19-69

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Tab to the From Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 9. Tab to the Quantity field and enter the number of batteries to adjust.

10. Tab to the To Type field and enter the destination type.

19-70

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

11. Tab to the To Loc field and change the location if it is other than the default setting. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform a Conversion of Junk EAs to LBs (JW)

19-71

PARC Cycle Count Module


Introduction
Each distribution center will perform a cycle count to reconcile the inventory and to have accurate data in the system. This document lays out the steps in the system to perform during a cycle count.

Procedure
To perform a cycle count, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

20-1

2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.

20-2

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

3. Enter option 12, PARC Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Cycle Count menu appears. Note: All customer and transfer orders are shipped. No orders can be between packed and shipped status. Perform daily balancing to assure that all inventory transactions have been done correctly.

4. Run the Beginning Costed Stock Status report by typing 2 on the command line. This is the

baseline report from which comparisons will be manually calculated. The report is sorted and totaled by G/L Class with an additional sort by third number.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

20-3

5. Press Enter. The screen displays the message Beginning Costed Stock Status submitted to

batch.

6. Run the Finishing Material report by typing 3 on the command line. 7. Press Enter. The screen displays the message Finishing Material submitted to batch.

20-4

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

8. Run the Multiple Serial Locations report by typing 4 on the command line, then pressing

Enter.
9. Verify the counts in these locations from the Multiple Serial Locations function. If pallets are

found in these locations that do not appear on the report, then run a Stock History by Serial Num. Report by typing 7, then pressing Enter. Use Option 10, Stock Locator Moves, to place the pallet in the proper location. Note: See How to Run a Stock History by Serial Number Report and How to Perform Stock Locator Moves for further instructions.

10. Run the Single Serial Locations procedure by typing 5 on the command line, then pressing

Enter. If pallets are found in these locations that do not appear on the report, then run a Stock History by Serial Num. report. Use Option 10, Stock Locator Moves, to place the pallet in the proper locations.
11. Run the Non-Serialized Locations report by typing 6 on the command line. 12. Press Enter. The screen displays the message Non-Serialized Locations submitted to

batch.

13. Run the Final Count Keying report to enter the new balances by typing 14 on the command

line, then pressing Enter. Note: See How to Enter Final Count Keying for special instructions on entering the new balances.

14. Run the Final Costed Stock Status report to compare to the Beginning Costed Stock Status by

typing 15 on the command line.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

20-5

15. Press Enter. The screen displays the message Final Costed Stock Status submitted to

batch.

16. Press F12 to return to the previous menu.

20-6

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number


Introduction
The Stock History by Serial Numbers Inquiry screen details all the history for specific serial numbers.

Procedure
To inquire on a stock history by serial numbers, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 12, PARC Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Cycle Count menu appears.


4. Enter option 7, Stock History by Serial Num., on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing ML$SER, and enter the search comparison value in the Test

column. Note: Press F1 in the field to view possible values.

6. Tab to the Value column, and enter the serial number(s) to search.

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

20-7

7. Press Enter. The Display Report screen appears.

8. Press F3 to exit.

20-8

How to Inquire on Stock History by Serial Number

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves


Introduction
Each distribution center will perform a cycle count to reconcile the inventory and to have accurate data in the system. This document explains the stock move process during a cycle count.

Procedure
To perform a stock locator move, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 12, PARC Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Cycle Count menu appears.


4. Enter option 10, Stock Locator Moves, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Movement Data Entry screen appears.

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

20-9

5. Enter option 2, Regular Move, on the line.

6. Press Enter. The screen refreshes, displaying a From Location and a To Location field.

20-10

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

7. Enter the appropriate data in the From Location field.

Note:

Depending on how the From Location field is set in the Default Location Maintenance, the program will work in one of three ways: 00=No restrictions or validation of pallet move from location 01=From location is invalid, but F2 accepts the move 02=Prohibits pallet moves from an invalid from location

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

20-11

8. Tab to the To Location field, and enter the appropriate data. The screen automatically

updates and a Serial# field appears.

9. Scan/enter the serial number to be moved. The screen automatically refreshes, displaying the

Stock Movement Data Entry screen with the From Location and To Location fields. The move is accepted so that the batteries are no longer associated with the serial number. Note: If entering the serial number manually, type an S before the number.

10. Continue to perform stock moves or press F3 to exit.

20-12

How to Perform Stock Locator Moves

How to Enter Final Count Keying


Introduction
Final count keying is the process to update the locator with the new ending balances from the non-serialized location and finishing material reports. The ending balance must be keyed to allow the system to compute the amount of the adjustment to be made. For any items listed on the non-serialized location and finishing materials reports with a quantity-on-hand, whether positive or negative, the actual count must be keyed. A zero must be keyed if zero was counted.

Procedure
To key the final count for a cycle count, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 12, PARC Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Cycle Count menu appears.


4. Enter option 14, Final Count Keying, on the command line, then press Enter. The Stock

Adjustments Data Entry screen appears.

How to Enter Final Count Keying

20-13

5. Enter CC in the Reason Code, then press Enter. The Stock Adjustments Data Entry

screen refreshes and displays additional fields.

6. Enter the battery type in the Type field. 7. Tab to the Loc field, and enter the location.

20-14

How to Enter Final Count Keying

8. Tab to the New Balance field, and enter the number of on-hand batteries in the location.

Note:

Enter 0.00 if zero was counted.

9. Press Enter to accept the data. The original The Stock Adjustments Data Entry screen

appears.
10. Press F3 to exit.

How to Enter Final Count Keying

20-15

20-16

How to Enter Final Count Keying

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions


Introduction
A Cycle Count (CC) conversion displays the adjustments made to the on-hand quantity of a locations battery type within the distribution center.

Procedure
To perform a cycle count stock adjustment, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 12, PARC Cycle Count Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Cycle Count menu appears.


4. Enter option 16, CC Cycle Count Conversion, on the command line, then press Enter. The

CC Cycle Count Conversion screen appears.

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions

20-17

5. Type 2 in the OP column in the row containing CC Conversion (Cycle Count), then press

Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears.

6. Tab to the Data Selection row of the 1 column, and type 1. 7. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

20-18

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions

8. Tab to the row containing Order Date and enter the order date in the Selection Value

column.
9. Press Enter to accept the data. 10. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears. 11. Press Enter. The CC Cycle Count Conversion screen appears. 12. Type 1 in the OP column adjacent to CC Conversion (Cycle Count), then press Enter.

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Perform CC Cycle Count Conversions

20-19

PARC Technical Operations Module


How to Work with Active Printers
Introduction
The function of working with active printers is to direct the output for a specific machines documents.

Procedure
To work with active printers, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Work with Active Printers

21-1

2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The PARC Team Menu screen appears.

21-2

How to Work with Active Printers

4. Enter option 21, Work with Active Printers, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The Work with Writers (WRKWTR) screen appears.

How to Work with Active Printers

21-3

6. Enter the device address or number of the printer in the Writer field. 7.

Press Enter and the screen refreshes and displays the Output field.

8. Press Enter and the Work with All Printers screen appears.

21-4

How to Work with Active Printers

9. Locate the device you want to work with and enter the appropriate option (1-8) in the Opt

column.
10. Press Enter and the corresponding device screen appears.

How to Work with Active Printers

21-5

21-6

How to Work with Active Printers

How to Work with User Spooled Files


Introduction
This utility allows you to view or work with a users spooled files.

Procedure
To work with spooled files, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Work with User Spooled Files

21-7

2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The PARC Team Menu screen appears.

21-8

How to Work with User Spooled Files

4. Enter option 20, Work with User Spooled Files, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) screen appears.

How to Work with User Spooled Files

21-9

6. Enter the user ID in the User field.

Note:

The default is *CURRENT, which is the person who is signed on.

7. Press Enter and the Work with All Spooled Files screen appears.

8. Locate the file/job to work with and enter the appropriate action in the Opt column. 9. Press Enter and the corresponding option for the file appears. 10. Press F3 to exit.

21-10

How to Work with User Spooled Files

Sales Order Reports Module


How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report
Introduction
The Open Orders by Customer report enables the viewing of all orders that are not shipped for a specific customer.

Procedure
To run an Open Orders by Customer report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report

22-1

2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Office Team Menu screen appears.

22-2

How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report

4. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.

How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report

22-3

6. Enter option 21, Sales Reports Menu, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Sales Order Reports Menu screen appears.

22-4

How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report

8. Enter option 2, Open Orders by Customer, on the command line.

9. Press Enter. The message Open Orders by Customer submitted to batch appears at the

bottom of the screen.

10. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu. How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report 22-5

22-6

How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report

How to Run a Customer Backorders Report


Introduction
The Customer Backorders report lists the batteries placed on backorder for customers.

Procedure
To run a Customer Backorders report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 21, Sales Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Order Reports Menu screen appears.


5. Enter option 3, Customer Back Orders Report, on the command line.

How to Run a Customer Backorders Report

22-7

6. Press Enter. The Customer Back Orders Report screen appears.

7. Type 2 in the OP column by the appropriate customer backorder, then press Enter. The

Selective Change Prompt appears.

8. Tab to the Data Selection row of the 1 column, and type 1.

22-8

How to Run a Customer Backorders Report

9. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

10. Enter the appropriate order date in the corresponding Selection Value column. 11. Press Enter to accept the data. 12. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 13. Press Enter. The Customer Back Orders Report screen appears. Anything greater than the

date entered will be printed.

How to Run a Customer Backorders Report

22-9

14. Type 1 in the OP column by Customer Backorders, then press Enter. Submitted appears

at the end of the rows.

15. Press F3 to exit.

22-10

How to Run a Customer Backorders Report

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report


Introduction
The Open Transfers Orders report lists all transfer orders that are not received.

Procedure
To run an Open Transfer Orders report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 21, Sales Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Order Reports Menu screen appears.


5. Enter option 4, Open Transfer Orders, on the command line.

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report

22-11

6. Press Enter. The message Open Transfer Orders submitted to batch appears at the bottom

of the screen.

7. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu.

22-12

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report

How to Run an Open Orders Report Sum by Day Report


Introduction
The Open Orders Report Sum by Day report provides information by customer department regarding past due orders, orders ten days out, and future orders.

Procedure
To run an Open Orders Report Sum by Day, perform the following steps:
8. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 9. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


10. Enter option 2, Sales Order Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Sales Order Report Menu screen appears.


11. Enter option 5, Open Orders Report Sum by Day, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Open Orders Report Sum by Day screen appears.

12. Press Enter. The Values for : Order Number Document Company screen appears. 13. Press Enter. The Values for : Order Type screen appears.

How to Run an Open Orders Report Sum by Day Report

22-13

14. Press Enter. The message Open Orders Report Sum by Day submitted to batch appears at

the bottom of the screen.

15. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu.

22-14

How to Run an Open Orders Report Sum by Day Report

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Sams)


Introduction
The Order Service report enables the viewing of the status of orders for Sams.

Procedure
To run an Order Service report for Sams, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line.

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Sams)

22-15

3. Press Enter. The Main Reports Menu screen appears.

4. Enter option 2, Sales Order Report Menu, on the command line.

22-16

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Sams)

5. Press Enter. The Sales Order Reports Menu screen appears.

6. Enter option 7, Order Service Rpt Sum (Sams), on the command line.

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Sams)

22-17

7. Press Enter. The Order Service Rpt Sum (Sams) screen appears.

8. Enter the appropriate data in the following fields.

Field 2. Enter From Date (MMDDYY) 3. Enter To Date (MMDDYY)

Description Enter the beginning date. Enter the ending date.

22-18

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Sams)

9. Press Enter. The Sales Order Reports Menu screen displays the message Order Service

Rpt Sum (Sams) submitted to batch.

10. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu.

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Sams)

22-19

22-20

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Sams)

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Wal-Mart)


Introduction
The Order Service report enables the viewing of the status of orders for Wal-Mart.

Procedure
To run an Order Service report summary for Wal-Mart, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Sales Order Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Order Service Rpt Sum (Wal), on the command line.

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Wal-Mart)

22-21

5. Press Enter. The Order Service Rpt Sum (Wal) screen appears.

6. Enter the appropriate data in the following fields.

Field 2. Enter From Date (MMDDYY) 3. Enter To Date (MMDDYY)

Description Enter the beginning date. Enter the ending date.

22-22

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Wal-Mart)

7. Press Enter. The Sales Order Reports Menu screen displays the message Order Service

Rpt Sum (Wal) submitted to batch.

8. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu.

How to Run an Order Service Report Sum (Wal-Mart)

22-23

Material Team Reports Module


How to Print Inventory POs
Introduction
The Print Inventory POs function enables the printing of all inventory POs for a location.

Procedure
To run a Print Inventory POs report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Print Inventory POs

23-1

2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Main Reports Menu screen appears.

23-2

How to Print Inventory POs

4. Enter option 3, Material Team Report Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.

23-3

How to Print Inventory POs

6. Enter option 2, Print Inventory POs, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Print Inventory POs screen appears.

23-4

How to Print Inventory POs

8. Press Enter. The message Print Inventory POs submitted to batch appears at the bottom

of the screen.

9. Press F12 to exit the menu.

23-5

How to Print Inventory POs

23-6

How to Print Inventory POs

How to Print Specific Inventory POs


Introduction
The Print Specific Inventory POs enables the printing of one or more inventory POs for a location.

Procedure
To run a Print Specific Inventory POs report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Print Specific Inventory POs, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Print Specific Inventory POs screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing Order Number, and enter the order number of the order to be

printed in the Value column. Note: If more than one order needs to be re-printed, enter *Value in the Value column in the row containing Order Number.

How to Print Specific Inventory POs

23-7

6. Press Enter. The Material Team Reports Menu screen appears, and the message Print

Specific Inventory POs submitted to batch displays at the bottom of the screen.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

23-8

How to Print Specific Inventory POs

How to Reprint Specific Inventory POs


Introduction
The Reprint Specific Inventory POs enables the reprinting of one or more inventory POs for a location.

Procedure
To run a Reprint a Specific Inventory POs report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Reprint specific Inventory POs, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Reprint specific Inventory POs screen appears.

How to Reprint Specific Inventory POs

23-9

5. Press Enter. The Values for : Order Number columns appear.

6. Enter the order(s) to be printed, and field exit after each entry. 7. Press Enter. The Material Team Reports Menu screen appears, and the message Reprint

specific Inventory PO submitted to batch displays at the bottom of the screen.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu. 23-10 How to Reprint Specific Inventory POs

How to Run a Purchased Inventory on Order Report


Introduction
The Purchased Inventory on Order report provides information regarding purchase inventory orders by type, vendor, and quantity.

Procedure
To run a Purchased Inventory on Order report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Purchased Inventory on Order, on the command line, then press Enter.

The message Purchased Inventory on Order submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Purchased Inventory on Order Report

23-11

23-12

How to Run a Purchased Inventory on Order Report

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report


Introduction
The Open Transfer Orders report lists all transfer orders that have not been received.

Procedure
To run an Open Transfer Orders report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Open Transfer Orders, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Open Transfer Orders submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu.

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report

23-13

23-14

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report

How to Run an Open Inventory POs by Vendor


Introduction
The Open Inventory POs by Vendor report provides information regarding open inventory purchase orders by vendor.

Procedure
To run a Purchased Inventory on Order report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 9, Open Inventory POs by Vendor, on the command line, then press Enter.

The message Open Inventory POs by Vendor submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run an Open Inventory POs by Vendor

23-15

23-16

How to Run an Open Inventory POs by Vendor

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report


Introduction
The Inventory PO Receipts report displays information of received inventory POs for the specified date range.

Procedure
To run an Inventory PO Receipts report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 10, Inventory PO Receipts, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Inventory PO Receipts screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing Inventory PO Receipts, and enter 2 in the OP column.

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report

23-17

6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears.

7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Tab to the row containing G/L Date, and enter 5 in the Opt column.

23-18

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report

10. Press Enter. The Query Selection Values screen appears.

11. Enter the appropriate date range of the orders to be printed, then press Enter. The Data

Selection screen reappears.


12. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen reappears. 13. Press Enter. The Inventory PO Receipts screen reappears. 14. Enter 1 in the OP column in the row containing Inventory PO Receipts

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report

23-19

15. Press Enter. The message Submitted appears at the end of the screen.

16. Press F3 to exit.

23-20

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report

How to Run a Monthly Conversion List Report


Introduction
The monthly conversion list report displays the doc type and transaction quantity for each battery conversion type for a month.

Procedure
To run a monthly conversion list report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Monthly Conversion List, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

5. Enter the appropriate dates in the VALUE field for the $DATE field, then press Enter.

How to Run a Monthly Conversion List Report

23-21

6. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen. Upon completion, the

Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

23-22

How to Run a Monthly Conversion List Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Operations Team Reports Module


How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Basic) Report
Introduction
The Inventory Planning Guide is a planning tool used by the distribution center management to plan for future activity at the distribution center. The guide list orders, battery types committed and other pertinent information about specific battery parts.

Procedure
To run an Inventory Planning Guide (Basic) report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Basic) Report

24-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Main Reports Menu screen appears.

24-2

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Basic) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Basic) Report

24-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, Inv. Planning Guide (Basic), on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The message Inv. Plan. Guide (Basic) submitted to batch appears at the bottom

of the screen.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu. 24-4 How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Basic) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Finished) Report


Introduction
The Inventory Planning Guide is a planning tool used by the distribution center management to plan for future activity at the distribution center. The guide lists orders, battery types on hand, battery types committed and other pertinent information about specific battery parts.

Procedure
To run an Inventory Planning Guide (Finished) report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Inv. Planning Guide (Finished), on the command line, then press Enter.

The message Inv. Plan. Guide (Finished) submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Finished) Report

24-5

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-6

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Finished) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Components) Report


Introduction
The Inventory Planning guide is a planning tool used by the distribution center management to plan for future activity at the distribution center. The guide lists orders, battery types on-hand, battery types committed and other pertinent information about specific battery parts. Note: In order to have an accurate components guide, you must first run the Basic Battery Inventory Planning Guide.

Procedure
To run an Inventory Planning Guide (Components) report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Inv. Planning Guide (Components), on the command line, then press

Enter. The message Inv. Plan. Guide (Components) submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Components) Report

24-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-8

How to Run an Inventory Planning Guide (Components) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Costed Stock Status Report


Introduction
The Costed Stock Status report lists the quantity and dollar amount of the current on-hand inventory at the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Costed Stock Status report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Costed Stock Status, on the command line, then press Enter. The message

Costed Stock Status submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Costed Stock Status Report

24-9

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-10

How to Run a Costed Stock Status Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Purchased Inventory on Order Report


Introduction
The Purchased Inventory on Order report identifies outstanding purchase orders for inventoried items.

Procedure
To run a Purchased Inventory on Order report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Purchased Inventory on Order, on the command line, then press Enter.

The message Purchased Inventory on Order submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Purchased Inventory on Order Report

24-11

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-12

How to Run a Purchased Inventory on Order Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report


Introduction
The Transit Orders In Transit report allows you to view inventory that has left the shipping locations, but has not yet arrived at the receiving location.

Procedure
To run Transfer Orders In Transit report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Transfer Orders In Transit, on the command line. The message Transfer

Orders In Transit submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report

24-13

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report DC Report


Introduction
A Daily Orders Report DC is a report identifying the orders a distribution center has placed.

Procedure
To run a Daily Orders Report DC report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Daily Orders Report DC, on the command line, then press Enter. The Daily

Orders Report DC screen appears.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report DC Report

24-14

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate data in the fields, then press Enter. The Operations Team Reports

Menu appears with the message Daily Orders Report DC submitted to batch.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report DC Report

24-15

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-16

How to Run a Daily Orders Report DC Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report by Customer Report


Introduction
A Daily Orders Report by Customer is a report identifying the orders placed by a specific customer at a distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Daily Orders Report by Customer report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 9, Daily Orders Report By Cust., on the command line, then press Enter. The

Daily Orders Report by Cust. screen appears.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report by Customer Report

24-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate data in the fields, then press Enter. The Operations Team Reports

Menu appears with the message Daily Orders Report By Cust. submitted to batch.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-18

How to Run a Daily Orders Report by Customer Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Production Recap by Line/User Report


Introduction
A Production Recap by Line/User is a report identifying the batteries produced per line per user signed on to the system.

Procedure
To run a Production Recap by Line/User report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 10, Production Recap by Line/User, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Production Recap by Line/User screen appears.

How to Run a Production Recap by Line/User Report

24-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate value in the Selection Value column, then press Enter.

6. Press Enter again and the next data entry screen appears.

7. Enter the ranges for time of day and press Enter. The Operations Team Reports Menu

screen appears with the message, Production Recap by Line/User submitted to batch.

24-20

How to Run a Production Recap by Line/User Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Production Recap by Line/User Report

24-21

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-22

How to Run a Production Recap by Line/User Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Battery Activity Report


Introduction
A Battery Activity report enables for the balancing within the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Battery Activity report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 9, Battery Activity, on the command line, then press Enter. The Battery

Activity screen appears.

Note: Note:

The beginning fiscal date changes once a year at the beginning of the new fiscal year. The fiscal period changes once a month (01 through 12). 01= April of current fiscal year. 12= March end of current fiscal year.

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

24-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Validate that the appropriate fiscal period is in the Beginning Fiscal Date and Fiscal Period

field. Then press Enter. The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears with the message, Battery Activity Report submitted to batch.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-24

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a P.O.R.S.


Introduction
A P.O.R.S (Production Order Shipping Report) report is a production management report.

Procedure
To run a P.O.R.S. report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 12, P.O.R.S., on the command line, then press Enter. The P.O.R.S. screen

appears.

5. Enter the production date to be printed in the Calendar date field, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears with the message P.O.R.S submitted to batch.

How to Run a P.O.R.S.

24-25

Exide Technologies, Inc.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-26

How to Run a P.O.R.S.

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a DC Summary Report


Introduction
The DC Summary report provides a quick reference to inventory and transactions within the DC.

Procedure
To run a DC Summary report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 23, DC Summary Report, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

summary report screen appears.

How to Run a DC Summary Report

24-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate information in the available fields, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Reports Menu screen appears with the message DC summary report submitted to batch.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-28

How to Run a DC Summary Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Plant Shipments Report


Introduction
The Plant Shipment report provides the distribution center with a detailed listing of the items shipped from each department.

Procedure
To run a Plant Shipment report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Plant Shipment Reports, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Plant Shipment Reports screen appears.

How to Run a Plant Shipments Report

24-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter again and the message, Plant Shipment Reports submitted to batch appears.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-30

How to Run a Plant Shipments Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Customer Service Report/Branch Ops Report


Introduction
The Customer Service reports provide statistics on the orders shipped to branch ops locations from distribution centers.

Procedure
To run a customer service reports/branch ops report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 16, Cust. Serv. Rpt/Branch Ops, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Cust. Serv. Rpt/Branch Ops screen appears.

How to Run a Customer Service Report/Branch Ops Report

24-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate data in the fields, then press Enter three times. The Operations Team

Reports Menu appears with the message, Cust. Serv. Rpt/Branch Ops submitted to batch.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-32

How to Run a Customer Service Report/Branch Ops Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Customer Service Reports by Branch Report


Introduction
The Customer Service reports provide statistics on the orders per distribution center compared to the orders shipped in a month.

Procedure
To run a Customer Service reports by Branch report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 17, Cust. Serv. Rprts. By Branch, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Cust. Serv. Rprts. By Branch screen appears.

How to Run a Customer Service Reports by Branch Report

24-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate data in the fields, then press Enter three times. The Operations Team

Reports Menu screen appears with the message, Cust. Serv. Rprts. By Branch submitted to batch.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-34

How to Run a Customer Service Reports by Branch Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Customer Service Reports by Parent # Report


Introduction
The Customer Service reports by parent identify the orders per customer base compared to the orders shipped in a month.

Procedure
To run a Customer Service Reports by Parent Number report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 18, Cust. Serv. Rprts. By Parent #, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Cust. Serv. Rprts. By Parent # screen appears.

How to Run a Customer Service Reports by Parent # Report

24-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate data in the fields, then press Enter three times. The Operations Team

Reports Menu appears with the message, Cust. Serv. Rprts. By Parent# submitted to batch.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-36

How to Run a Customer Service Reports by Parent # Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Fill % by Business Unit/Ship To Report


Introduction
The Fill Percent by Business Unit/Ship To report identifies the degree of order fulfillment to the customer.

Procedure
To run a Fill Percent by Business Unit/Ship To report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 19, Fill % by Bus. Unit/Ship To, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Fill % by Bus. Unit/Ship to screen appears.

How to Run a Fill % by Business Unit/Ship To Report

24-37

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate value(s) in the field(s), the press Enter. The Data Selection screen

appears.

6. Enter the appropriate value in the Selection Value column, then press Enter. Another screen

appears based on the value entered in the Selection Value column.

24-38

How to Run a Fill % by Business Unit/Ship To Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. Continue to enter the requested value in the corresponding fields of each screen,

pressing Enter until the Operations Team Menu appears with the message, Fill % by Bus. Unit/Ship to submitted to batch.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Fill % by Business Unit/Ship To Report

24-39

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-40

How to Run a Fill % by Business Unit/Ship To Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run Fill % by Ship To Report


Introduction
The Fill Percent by Ship To report identifies the degree of order fulfillment to the customer.

Procedure
To run a Fill Percent by Ship To report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 20, Fill % by Ship to, on the command line, then press Enter. The Fill % by

Ship to screen appears.

How to Run Fill % by Ship To Report

24-41

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate value(s) in the field(s), the press Enter. The Data Selection screen

appears.

6. Enter the appropriate value in the Selection Value column, then press Enter. Another screen

appears based on the value entered in the Selection Value column.

24-42

How to Run Fill % by Ship To Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. Continue to enter the requested value in the corresponding fields of each screen,

pressing Enter until the Operations Team Reports Menu appears with the message, Fill % by Ship to submitted to batch.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run Fill % by Ship To Report

24-43

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-44

How to Run Fill % by Ship To Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Fill % by SKU # Report


Introduction
The Fill Percent by SKU # report identifies the degree of order fulfillment to the customer.

Procedure
To run a Fill Percent by SKU Number report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 21, Fill % by SKU, on the command line, then press Enter. The Fill % by

SKU# screen appears.

How to Run a Fill % by SKU # Report

24-45

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate value(s) in the field(s), the press Enter. The Data Selection screen

appears.

6. Enter the appropriate value in the Selection Value column, then press Enter. Another screen

appears based on the value entered in the Selection Value column.

24-46

How to Run a Fill % by SKU # Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. Continue to enter the requested value in the corresponding fields of each screen,

pressing Enter until the Operations Team Reports Menu appears with the message, Fill % by SKU# to submitted to batch.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Fill % by SKU # Report

24-47

Exide Technologies, Inc.

24-48

How to Run a Fill % by SKU # Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Finishing Line Schedule Report


Introduction
The Finishing Line schedule gives the batteries scheduled to be produced per work center at the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Finishing Line Schedule report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Finishing Line Schedule, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Finishing Line Schedule screen appears

How to Run a Finishing Line Schedule Report

24-49

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the appropriate start date for the report in the Enter From Date field, then press Enter.

The message, Finishing Line Schedule submitted to batch, appears at the bottom of the screen.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-50

How to Run a Finishing Line Schedule Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a History by User Name Report


Introduction
The History by User Name report provides information on user activity.

Procedure
To run a History by User Name report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 23, History by User Name, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears

5. Locate the fields containing CDATE and MLUSER.

How to Run a History by User Name Report

24-51

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter the appropriate data in the Test and Value columns of the rows containing CDATE

and MLUSER, then press Enter. The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

24-52

How to Run a History by User Name Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Recap of Batteries by Trip Report


Introduction
The Recap of Batteries by Trip report provides information of battery types and quantities by trip.

Procedure
To run a Recap of Batteries by Trip report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 24, Recap of batteries by trip, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

How to Run a Recap of Batteries by Trip Report

24-53

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Locate the field containing TS$TRP. 6. Enter the appropriate data in the Test and Value columns of the row containing TS$TRP,

then press Enter. The Operations Team Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F3 to exit the menu.

24-54

How to Run a Recap of Batteries by Trip Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Stock Locator Reports Module


How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report
Introduction
The Stock Locator by Type report lists all the locations for a specific battery type.

Procedure
To run the Stock Locator by Type report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report

25-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Main Reports Menu screen appears.

25-2

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line

5. Press Enter. The Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report

25-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, Stock Locator by Type, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Select Records screen appears.

25-4

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

9. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report

25-5

Exide Technologies, Inc.

25-6

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report


Introduction
The Serial Number Lookup report prints the details of a pallet for specific serial numbers.

Procedure
To run a Serial Number Lookup report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Serial Number Lookup, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing MF$SER, and enter the search comparison value in the Test

column, if other than the default value is needed. Note: Press F1 to display possible values.

How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report

25-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Value column, and enter the serial number(s) to search.

Note:

If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single location in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more locations, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to locations in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.

7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

25-8

How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report


Introduction
The single location lookup enables one to locate the type of stock in a single stock location, such as 5555Z.

Procedure
To run a Single Location Lookup report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Single Location Lookup, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Enter the appropriate stock location in the Value field, then press Enter.

Note: Note:

Press F11 to display the meaning of values in the Field column. If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single battery type in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more battery types, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to battery types in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.
25-9

How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

25-10

How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Single Type Lookup Report


Introduction
The single type lookup finds the location of a specific type of battery.

Procedure
To run a Single Type Lookup report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Single Type Lookup, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing MFAITM, and enter the appropriate basic or finished item

number in single quotes in the Value column. Note: Note: In the Test field, enter EQ for a single lookup or LIST for multiple lookups. Press F11 to display the meaning of the values in the Field column. If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single battery type in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more battery types, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the

How to Run a Single Type Lookup Report

25-11

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Test field, enter the from and the to battery types in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.
6. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

25-12

How to Run a Single Type Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Location Report


Introduction
The Stock Locator by Location report identifies the location of all the specific battery types in the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Stock Locator by Location report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Stock Locator by Location, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Location Report

25-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter to run the query. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the

screen. Upon completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

25-14

How to Run a Stock Locator by Location Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Manufacturing Date Report


Introduction
The Stock Locator by Manufacturing Date report lists the batteries in stock by their manufacture date.

Procedure
To run a Stock Locator by Manufacturing Date report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Stock Locator by Mfg. Date, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Manufacturing Date Report

25-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

25-16

How to Run a Stock Locator by Manufacturing Date Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock In Transit by Type Report


Introduction
The Stock In Transit by Type report identifies the batteries being shipped to the distribution center by a specific type of battery.

Procedure
To run a Stock In Transit by Type report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 9, Stock In Transit by Type, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.


5. Press Enter to run the query. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the

screen. Upon completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Stock In Transit by Type Report

25-17

Exide Technologies, Inc.

25-18

How to Run a Stock In Transit by Type Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock History by Transaction Date Report


Introduction
The Stock History by Transaction Date report details the stock inventory by transactions from the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Stock History by Transaction Date report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 10, Stock History by Transaction Date, on the command line, then press

Enter. The Select Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing $DATE, and enter the range of dates to search in the Value

column. Note: Note: In the Test field, enter EQ for a single lookup or LIST for multiple lookups. Press F11 to display the meaning of the values in the Field column. If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single serial number in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more serial numbers, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the
25-19

How to Run a Stock History by Transaction Date Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Test field, enter the from and the to numbers in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.
6. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

25-20

How to Run a Stock History by Transaction Date Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock History by Serial Number Report


Introduction
The Stock History by Serial Number report details all the history for specific serial numbers.

Procedure
To run a Stock History by Serial Number report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 11, Stock History by Serial Num., on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing ML$SER, and enter the appropriate data in the Test column, if

other than the default value is needed.


6. Tab to the Value column, and enter the serial number to search.

Note:

If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single serial number in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more serial numbers, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to numbers in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.
25-21

How to Run a Stock History by Serial Number Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

25-22

How to Run a Stock History by Serial Number Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock Move History Report


Introduction
The Stock Move History report tracks the moving of batteries per location per user.

Procedure
To run a Stock Move History report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Reports Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 12, Stock Move History, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Enter the appropriate stock location in the Value field.

Note:

If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single location in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more locations, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to locations in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.

How to Run a Stock Move History Report

25-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Stock Locator Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

25-24

How to Run a Stock Move History Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Routing Reports Module


How to Run a Trip Number Tracking Report
Introduction
The Trip Number Tracking report provides detailed information of orders by customer.

Procedure
To run a Trip Number Tracking report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Run a Trip Number Tracking Report

26-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Main Report Menu screen appears.

26-2

How to Run a Trip Number Tracking Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The Routing Report Menu screen appears.

How to Run a Trip Number Tracking Report

26-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, Trip Number Tracking, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Trip Number Tracking submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

26-4

How to Run a Trip Number Tracking Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed Report


Introduction
The Orders To Be Routed Detailed report provides detailed information of orders by customer.

Procedure
To run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Routing Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Orders To Be Routed Detailed, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Orders To Be Routed Detailed screen appears.

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed Report

26-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Perform the following steps to identify the orders to include in the report.

IF the data selection criteria is Acceptable,

THEN enter 1 in the OP field in row containing Order to be Routed Detailed, and press Enter. The message Submitted appears at the end of the row. Skip to step 15. 2 in the appropriate row, and press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears.

Unacceptable,

6. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and enter 1.

26-6

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

8. To add a data selection criterion, press F16. The possible criteria appear.

9. Tab to the criterion to be added, and enter the appropriate value in the Test field.

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed Report

26-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Tab to the Selection Value field, and enter the appropriate value.

11. Press Enter. The list of all possible criteria disappears, displaying only the selected criteria. 12. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt re-appears. 13. Press Enter. The Orders To Be Routed Detailed screen reappears.

26-8

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Enter 1 in the OP field in the appropriate row, and press Enter. The message Submitted

appears at the end of the row.

15. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed Report

26-9

Exide Technologies, Inc.

26-10

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Detailed Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Summary Report


Introduction
The Orders To Be Routed Summary report lists only the orders that need to be shipped from the distribution center. There will be no detail about the orders in this report.

Procedure
To run an Orders To Be Routed Summary report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Routing Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Orders To Be Routed, on the command line, then press Enter. The Orders

To Be Routed Summary screen appears.

5. Tab to the OP column for the row containing Orders to be Routed <=545 SUM, and type 2.

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Summary Report

26-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears.

7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Tab to the Opt column of the row containing Department, and change the information in the

Test and Value columns if applicable.

26-12

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Summary Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter, and the Query Selection Values screen appears.

11. Enter the department(s), enclosed in single quotes, then press Enter. The Data Selection

screen appears. Note: Type over the existing department number or field exit to delete it.

12. Press Enter. The Orders To Be Routed Summary screen appears with the Selective

Change Prompt menu screen.


13. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt menu screen disappears. 14. Tab to the OP column for the row containing Orders to be Routed <=545 SUM, and type 1.

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Summary Report

26-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press Enter. The message Submitted appears at the end of the row.

16. Press F3 to exit.

26-14

How to Run an Orders To Be Routed Summary Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Orders Without Pick Numbers Report


Introduction
The Orders Without Pick Numbers report identifies orders that have not been assigned a pick number. This enables the distribution center to assign a pick number so that the order may be processed.

Procedure
To run an Orders Without Pick Numbers report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Routing Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Orders without Pick Numbers, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Orders without Pick Numbers screen appears.

How to Run an Orders Without Pick Numbers Report

26-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Perform the following steps to identify the orders to include in the report.

IF the data selection criteria is THEN Acceptable, Enter 1 in the OP field in the appropriate row, and press Enter. The message Submitted appears at the end of the row. Skip to step 15. Enter 2 in the appropriate row, then press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears.

Unacceptable,

6. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and enter 1.

26-16

How to Run an Orders Without Pick Numbers Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

8. To add a data selection criterion, press F16. The possible criteria appear.

How to Run an Orders Without Pick Numbers Report

26-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Tab to the criterion to be added, and enter the appropriate value in the Test field. Page down,

if necessary, to view the desired criterion.

10. Tab to the Selection Value field, and enter the appropriate value.

26-18

How to Run an Orders Without Pick Numbers Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Press Enter. The list of all possible criteria disappears, displaying only the selected criteria.

12. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt reappears. 13. Press Enter. The Orders Without Pick Numbers screen reappears.

How to Run an Orders Without Pick Numbers Report

26-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Enter 1 in the OP field in the appropriate row, and press Enter. The message Submitted

appears at the end of the row.

15. Press F3 to exit.

26-20

How to Run an Orders Without Pick Numbers Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Non-Shipped Order Summary Report


Introduction
This report identifies all the orders that have a status other than shipped. This enables one to view any orders pending shipment.

Procedure
To run a Non-Shipped Order Summary report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Routing Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Non Shipped Order Summary, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the Value column in the row containing SDNXTR, and enter the desired range for the

status code if other than the default.

How to Run a Non-Shipped Order Summary Report

26-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen.

When the query completes, the Routing Reports Menu reappears.


7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

26-22

How to Run a Non-Shipped Order Summary Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Pre-Finished Customer Detail Report


Introduction
This report lists all the orders for the pre-finished customers for the specified distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Pre-Finished Customer Detail report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Routing Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Prefinished Customer Detail, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

How to Run a Pre-Finished Customer Detail Report

26-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the desired search criteria in the corresponding field, if other than the default. Press

Enter, and the message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen.

When the query completes, the Routing Reports Menu reappears.


6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

26-24

How to Run a Pre-Finished Customer Detail Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Non-PF Customer Detail Report


Introduction
The Non Pre-finished Customer Detail report identifies all the items a customer, who does not require the distribution center to maintain pre-finished product, has ordered.

Procedure
To run a Non-PF Customer Detail report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Routing Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Non P/F Customer Detail, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

How to Run a Non-PF Customer Detail Report

26-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter the desired search criteria in the corresponding fields, if other than the default. Press

Enter, and the message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen.

When the query completes, the Routing Reports Menu reappears.


6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

26-26

How to Run a Non-PF Customer Detail Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Purged Trip Numbers Report


Introduction
The purged trip numbers report is used to obtain information on trips that have been purged.

Procedure
To run a Purged Trip Numbers report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Routing Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 9, Purged Trip Numbers, on the command line, then press Enter. The Purged

Trip Numbers screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing PURGTRIPNO, and type 2 in the OP column.

How to Run a Purged Trip Numbers Report

26-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears.

7. Tab to the Data Selection row, and type 1. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

26-28

How to Run a Purged Trip Numbers Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Perform the following steps to enter the invoice numbers:

IF the Opt field Does not contain a plus sign,

THEN Tab to the Selection Value column, and enter the invoice number. Proceed to Step 10. Type 5 in the Opt field and press Enter to display the Query Selection Values screen. Enter the invoice numbers.

Contains a plus sign (+),

10. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen reappears.

Note:

If there is more than one invoice number, enter the invoice numbers separated with a space.

11. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen reappears. 12. Press Enter. The Purged Trip Numbers screen reappears.

How to Run a Purged Trip Numbers Report

26-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Type 1 in the OP column, then press Enter. The message Submitted appears at the end of

the row.

14. Press F3 to exit.

26-30

How to Run a Purged Trip Numbers Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Loaded Truck Report


Introduction
A loaded truck report displays information about pallets on a trip by sequence number.

Procedure
To run a Loaded Truck report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 6, Routing Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Routing Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 13, Loaded Truck Report, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Loaded Truck Report screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing TRKLOADXXX, and type 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the Data Selection row, and type 1.

How to Run a Loaded Truck Report

26-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

26-32

How to Run a Loaded Truck Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Perform the following steps to enter the trip numbers:

IF the Opt field Does not contain a plus sign,

THEN Tab to the Selection Value column in the row containing Trip Number, and enter the trip number. Proceed to Step 10. Type 5 in the Opt field in the row containing Trip Number and press Enter to display the Query Selection Values screen. Enter the trip numbers.

Contains a plus sign (+),

10. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen reappears. 11. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen reappears. 12. Press Enter. The Loaded Truck Report screen reappears.

How to Run a Loaded Truck Report

26-33

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Type 1 in the OP column, then press Enter. The message Submitted appears at the end of

the row.

14. Press F3 to exit.

26-34

How to Run a Loaded Truck Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Reconciliation Reports Module


How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report
Introduction
The Transfer Orders In Transit report enables the viewing of the problems that may have occurred with an order of batteries being shipped to the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Transfer Orders In Transit report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.

How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report

27-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 2, Transfer Orders In Transit, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Transfer Orders In Transit submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

27-2

How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report


Introduction
The Transfer Orders Shipped report enables the viewing of problems that may have occurred in transferring orders shipped from one distribution center to another. The report gives the order number, order type, quantity shipped, and other pertinent information about the transfer.

Procedure
To run a Transfer Orders Shipped report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Transfer Orders Shipped, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Transfer Orders Shipped screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing Transfer Orders Shipped, and type 2 in the OP column.

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report

27-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears.

7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Tab to the row containing Actual Ship, and enter the appropriate ship date in the Selection

Value column.
27-4 How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen reappears. 11. Press Enter. The Transfer Orders Shipped screen reappears. 12. Type 1 in the OP column of the Transfer Orders Shipped row. 13. Press Enter. Submitted appears at the end of the row.

14. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report

27-5

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-6

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report


Introduction
The Transfer Receipts (Batteries) report compares the paperwork from physical receipts to what was received for daily balancing requirements according to JD Edwards.

Procedure
To run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Transfer Receipts (Batteries), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Transfer Receipts (Batteries) screen appears.

5. Enter 2 in the row containing TRNSFRRCPT, then press Enter. The Selective Change

Prompt screen appears.


6. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column. 7. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears. 8. Tab to the row containing G/L Date, and enter the appropriate date in the Selection Value

column.
9. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen reappears. How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report 27-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen reappears. 11. Press Enter. The Transfer Rcpts (Batteries) screen reappears. 12. Type 1 in the OP column of the TRNSFRRCPT row. 13. Press Enter. Submitted appears at the end of the row.

14. Press F3 to exit.

27-8

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Components) Report


Introduction
The Transfer Receipts (Components) Report compares the paperwork from physical receipts to what was received according to JD Edwards.

Procedure
To run a Transfer Receipts (Components) Report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Transfer Rcpts (Components), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Transfer Rcpts (Components) screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing CMPNNTSRCT, and type 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Components) Report

27-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Tab to the row containing G/L Date, and enter the appropriate date in the Selection Value

column.
10. Press Enter. The Query Selection Values screen appears.

11. Enter the range of G/L dates, then press Enter. The Data Selection screen re-appears. 27-10 How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Components) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen re-appears. 13. Press Enter. The Transfer Rcpts (Components) screen re-appears. 14. Type 1 in the OP column of the CMPNNTSRCT row. 15. Press Enter. Submitted appears at the end of the row.

16. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Components) Report

27-1

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-12

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Components) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an RMA Returns Report


Introduction
The RMA (Returns Merchandise Authorization) report enables the viewing of problems related to previously entered credit orders that may have occurred during credit order entry on any batteries returned to the distribution center.

Procedure
To run an RMA Returns report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, RMA Returns, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select Records

screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing $DATE, and enter the date range in the Value field.

How to Run an RMA Returns Report

27-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Page down to row containing SDADDJ, and enter the second date range.

Note:

The second date range will be same as the first, except entered in the Julian format.

7. Press Enter. After the records are processed, the report will print. The Reconciliation

Report Menu displays.


8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

27-14

How to Run an RMA Returns Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report


Introduction
The Items/Orders Shipped by Trip report enables the viewing of problems that may have occurred to items or an order to be shipped on a trip.

Procedure
To run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Items/Order Shipped by Trip, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Items/Order Shipped by Trip screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing SOE0003, and enter 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

27-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Enter the actual ship date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter.

The Selective Change Prompt screen reappears.


10. Press Enter. The Items/Order Shipped by Trip screen reappears.

27-16

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter 1 in the OP column in the row containing SOE003, then press Enter. The message

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

27-17

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-18

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report


Introduction
The Daily Orders Shipped report enables the viewing of problems that may have occurred in daily orders that were shipped.

Procedure
To run a Daily Orders Shipped report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Daily Orders Shipped, on the command line, then press Enter. The Daily

Orders Shipped screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing Daily Order Shipped, and type 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears. 9. Enter the ship date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter. The

Selective Change Prompt screen reappears.

How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report

27-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Daily Orders Shipped screen reappears. 11. Enter 1 in the OP column of the row containing Daily Orders Shipped, then press Enter.

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

12. Press F3 to exit.

27-20

How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Battery Activity Report


Introduction
The Battery Activity report enables balancing within the PARC.

Procedure
To run a Battery Activity report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office

Team Menu screen appears.

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

27-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry screen appears.

4. Enter option 11, Credit Order Processing Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Credit Order Processing Menu screen appears.

27-22

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 23, Main PARC Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Main Report Menu screen appears.

6. Enter option 2, Battery Activity Report, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Battery Activity Report screen appears.

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

27-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Validate the information in the Begining Fiscal Date (MMDDYY) and Fiscal Period fields,

then press Enter. The message Battery Activity submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen. Note: Note: The fiscal period will change only when a new month begins. Example: 01 is the first month of the fiscal year. The beginning fiscal date will change only once a year when the new fiscal year begins.

8. Press F3 to exit.

27-24

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Ship by Trip Report


Introduction
The Ship by Trip report provides summarized order information for specified trips by sequence.

Procedure
To run a Ship by Trip report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 10, Ship by Trip, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select Records

screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing $SHIPDATE, and enter the search comparison value in the Test

column. Note: Press F1 in the field to view possible values.

6. Tab to the Value column, and enter the appropriate date(s) to search.

How to Run a Ship by Trip Report

27-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen. When the

query finishes, the Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

27-26

How to Run a Ship by Trip Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Order by Receiving Report


Introduction
The Transfer Orders by Receiving report enables the viewing of the problems that may have occurred with an order of batteries being received into the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Transfer Order by Receiving Report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 11, Transfer Order by Receiving, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Transfer Order by Receiving screen appears.

5. Enter the appropriate order type in the Shipping Order Type field if other than the default. 6. Tab to the Receiving Location field, and enter either *ALL or the specific receiving location

to be shown on the report.

How to Run a Transfer Order by Receiving Report

27-27

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The Reconciliation Reports Menu screen appears, displaying the message

Transfer Order by Receiving submitted to batch at the bottom of the screen.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

27-28

How to Run a Transfer Order by Receiving Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Order by Shipping Report


Introduction
The Transfer Orders by Shipping report enables the viewing of the problems that may have occurred with an order of batteries being shipped to the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Transfer Order by Shipping Report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 12, Transfer Order by Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Transfer Order by Receiving screen appears.

5. Enter the appropriate order type in the Shipping Order Type field if other than the default. 6. Tab to the Shipping Location field, and enter *ALL or the specific shipping location to be

shown on the report.

How to Run a Transfer Order by Shipping Report

27-29

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The Reconciliation Reports Menu screen appears, displaying the message

Transfer Order by Shipping submitted to batch at the bottom of the screen.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

27-30

How to Run a Transfer Order by Shipping Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an N Conversion (Type to Type) Report


Introduction
An N conversion is a type to type conversion for batteries.

Procedure
To run an N conversion reconciliation report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, N Conversion (Type to Type), on the command line, then press Enter. The

N Conversion (Type to Type) screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing N Conversion (Type to Type), and type 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run an N Conversion (Type to Type) Report

27-31

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Enter the order date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter. The

Selective Change Prompt screen reappears.


10. Press Enter. The N Conversion (Type to Type) screen reappears.

27-32

How to Run an N Conversion (Type to Type) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter 1 in the OP column of the row containing N Conversion (Type to Type), then press

Enter. Submitted appears at the end of the row.

12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run an N Conversion (Type to Type) Report

27-33

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-34

How to Run an N Conversion (Type to Type) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report


Introduction
The Conversion (Junk) report enables the viewing of problems that may have occurred during the conversion of junk batteries in the inventory.

Procedure
To run a Conversion (Junk) reconciliation report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 15, Conversion (Junk), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Conversion (Junk) screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing Conversion (Junk), and type 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report

27-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Enter the order date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter. The

Selective Change Prompt screen reappears.


10. Press Enter. The Conversion (Junk) screen reappears.

27-36

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter 1 in the OP column of the row containing Conversion (Junk), then press Enter.

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report

27-37

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-38

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report


Introduction
The Conversion (Blem) report enables the viewing of problems that may have occurred during the conversion of blem batteries in the inventory.

Procedure
To run a Conversion for Blem report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 16, Conversion (Blem) Report, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Conversion (Blem) screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing Conversion (Blem), and type 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report

27-39

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Enter the order date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter. The

Selective Change Prompt screen reappears.


10. Press Enter. The Conversion (Blem) screen reappears.

27-40

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter 1 in the OP column of the row containing Conversion (Blem), then press Enter.

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report

27-41

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-42

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report


Introduction
A CC Cycle Count Conversion report identifies adjustments to a location.

Procedure
To run a CC Cycle Count Conversion report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 17, CC Cycle Count Conversion, on the command line, then press Enter. The

CC Cycle Count Conversion screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing CC Conversion (Cycle Count), and type 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report

27-43

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Enter the order date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter. The

Selective Change Prompt screen reappears.


10. Press Enter. The CC Cycle Count Conversion screen reappears.

27-44

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter 1 in the OP column of the row containing Conversion (Blem), then press Enter.

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report

27-45

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-46

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report


Introduction
An Inventory PO Receipts report compares the inventory received according to JD Edwards to that which was actually physically received.

Procedure
To run an Inventory PO Receipts report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 18, Inventory PO Receipts, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Inventory PO Receipts screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing Inventory PO Receipts, and type 2 in the OP column. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen appears. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report

27-47

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Tab to the row containing G/L Date, and enter the appropriate General Ledger date in the

Selection Value column.


10. Tab to the row containing Order Number, and enter the appropriate order number date in

the Selection Value column.


11. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt screen reappears. 12. Press Enter. The Inventory PO Receipts screen reappears.

27-48

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Enter 1 in the OP column of the row containing Inventory PO Receipts, then press Enter.

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

14. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report

27-49

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-50

How to Run an Inventory PO Receipts Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an ST/OT Report Shipping Report


Introduction
The ST/OT report identifies the transfer orders shipped from the distribution center.

Procedure
To run an ST/OT report-shipping report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 19, ST/OT report - Shipping, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message ST/OT report - Shipping submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run an ST/OT Report Shipping Report

27-51

Exide Technologies, Inc.

27-52

How to Run an ST/OT Report Shipping Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an ST/OT Report - Receiving Report


Introduction
The ST/OT report identifies the transfer orders received by the distribution center.

Procedure
To run an ST/OT report-receiving report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 23, Main Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Report Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 7, Reconciliation Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Reconciliation Report Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 20, ST/OT report - Receiving, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message ST/OT report - Receiving submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run an ST/OT Report - Receiving Report

27-53

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Sales Order Inquiries Module


How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen
Introduction
The Customer Service Inquiry screen allows you to view order data.

Procedure
To use the Customer Service Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line.

How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen

28-1

Exide Technologies, Inc.

3. Press Enter. The Office Team Menu screen appears.

4. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry screen, on the command line.

28-2

How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

5. Press Enter. The DC Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.

6. Enter option 22, Sales Inquiries Menu, on the command line.

How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen

28-3

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7. Press Enter. The Sales Order Inquiries screen appears.

28-4

How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Enter option 2, Customer Service, on the command line.

9. Press Enter. The Customer Service screen appears.

How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen

28-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Perform the following steps as necessary to display the desired data:

Note: Use any entry field on this screen to specify search criteria. The more information you enter for the search, the quicker the search runs. IF you want to Display data for a specific order, Display new orders that do not yet have an assigned pick number, THEN Enter the order number and order type in the Order No field. Continue to Step 11. Perform the following steps: Enter a distribution center in the Business Unit field, if known. If the distribution center is not known, enter *. Enter 520 in the Status field and 540 in the Thru field. Perform one of following for the St field: Enter 1 - To display orders whose last status falls within the 520 to 540 range. Leave blank (Default) To display orders whose next status falls within the 520 to 540 range.

Enter the department number in the Parent # field.

Note: If you press Enter without entering data, the screen displays all orders for the default business unit beginning with the first order entered on J.D. Edwards software. Note: If you enter the order number (Order No field) without the order type (the field located to the right of the Order No field) and the system finds more than one order with the same number but different order types, a window appears. The window displays the orders with the same number. Select the order you want to view by entering 4 in the selection field beside the desired order and press Enter.
11. Press Enter.

Note: If the system must read a large amount of records for the search, the I/O Limit Exceeded window appears indicating that you have read an excessive amount of records. Press F6 until the desired data appears, or press F5 to end the search and view currently found data.

28-6

How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

The Customer Service screen appears and displays data according to the selection data that you entered.

Note: In this example, the order number was entered as selection data.
12. Press F3 to exit this screen.

How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen

28-7

Exide Technologies, Inc.

28-8

How to Use the Customer Service Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Sales Ledger Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Sales Ledger Inquiry screen allows you to view sale order information. You can also use this screen to view cancel lines from an order.

Procedure
To use the Sales Ledger Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Sales Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Order Inquiries screen appears.


5. Enter option 3, Sales Ledger Inquiry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Ledger Inquiry screen appears.

6. Enter an order number in the Order Number field.

How to Use the Sales Ledger Inquiry Screen

28-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Verify that the default business unit in the Business Unit field is correct. If not, enter the

business unit. Note: If the business unit is unknown, enter * in the Business Unit field.

28-10

How to Use the Sales Ledger Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Sales Ledger Inquiry screen appears and displays each step in the order

process. In the example here, the individual process steps are displayed for order number 1114206.

How to Use the Sales Ledger Inquiry Screen

28-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Perform the following steps if necessary to cancel a line in an order:

IF you want to display Detailed data for a line in the order,

THEN Tab to the appropriate O (option) field, and enter 5.

NOTE: An O field is located to the left of each step of the order process. Press Enter. The Sales Ledger Detail screen appears and displays detailed information for each step of the order process chosen. Skip to Step 13.

The order process steps for a customer type and order number,

Enter 5 in the O (option) field for each line of the same order and customer type. NOTE: In the example used here, 1114206 is the order number and 9002 is the customer type. The individual lines for 9002 are the lines in the order process.

28-12

How to Use the Sales Ledger Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Sales Ledger Detail screen appears with detailed data for the first line of

the order process.

Note: In the example here, the detail screen shows that the last status (Last/Next Status field) for the first line of the order was 520 (enter sales order) and the next status was 540 (print picking slips). Note: If a line of the order has been cancelled in the sales order entry process, the last/next status (Last/Next Sts) of the line is 980/999. If the line was cancelled during the packing process, the last/next status is 984/999. Note: To identify the person who cancelled the line, enter 5 in the O (option) field beside the cancelled line, and press Enter. The Sales Ledger Detail screen appears. The User ID field contains the identification of the person who cancelled the line.
11. Continue to press Enter as necessary to display successive lines in the order process.

How to Use the Sales Ledger Inquiry Screen

28-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Press F3 to return to the previous line(s). When you display the detail screen for the first line

in the process, press F3 to close the detail screen and display the Sales Ledger Inquiry screen.

13. Press F3 to exit this screen. The detail screen closes, and the Sales Ledger Inquiry screen

appears.
14. Press F3 to exit.

28-14

How to Use the Sales Ledger Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Delivery Notes Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Delivery Notes Inquiry screen allows you to view the ship to number, carrier, and delivery number for batteries being shipped.

Procedure
To use the Delivery Notes Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Sales Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Order Inquiries screen appears.


5. Enter option 4, Delivery Notes Inquiry, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Delivery Notes Inquiry screen appears.

6. Enter one of the following as search criteria:

Order number in the Order Number field. Shipment number (bill of lading number) in the Shipment Number field.
28-15

How to Use the Delivery Notes Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter the business unit in the Branch/Plant field. If the business unit is not known, enter * in

the field.
8. Press Enter. The screen displays the delivery note number and the date the note was printed.

9. Press F4 to unfold the screen and display additional information.

28-16

How to Use the Delivery Notes Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

10. Press F4 to refold the data on the screen. 11. Press F3 to exit this screen.

How to Use the Delivery Notes Inquiry Screen

28-17

Exide Technologies, Inc.

28-18

How to Use the Delivery Notes Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the EDI-Display Download Runtimes Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The EDI-Display Download Run Times Inquiry screen allows you to view information regarding the last EDI sales order creation by start/finish date, time, and customer. You can also view the last EDI downloaded purchase orders from GEIS.

Procedure
To use the Sales Ledger Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Sales Order Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, EDI-Display Download RunTimes, on the command line, then press Enter.

The EDI Completion Information screen appears.

5. Press F3 to exit this screen.

How to Use the EDI-Display Download Runtimes Inquiry Screen

28-19

Exide Technologies, Inc.

28-20

How to Use the EDI-Display Download Runtimes Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Item Cross-Reference Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Item Cross-Reference Inquiry screen allows you to view item cross-reference data.

Procedure
To use the Item Cross-Reference Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Sales Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Order Inquiries screen appears.


5. Enter option 6, Item Cross-Reference, on the command line, then press Enter. The Item

Cross-Reference screen appears.

How to Use the Item Cross-Reference Inquiry Screen

28-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Perform the following steps as necessary to display the desired data:

IF you want to Verify that a battery type is still valid, Display data for a specific customer type and finished battery number, Display all records in the customers line,

THEN Enter the item number in the Item Number field, and press Enter. The list of item numbers appears. Continue to Step 8. Enter the customer type in the X-Ref Number field and press Enter. A list of data for the customer type appears. Skip to Step 9. Enter the department number in the Address Number field and press Enter. The screen displays all items for that customer/department number as well as other data. Continue to Step 9. Enter the order number in the Order Number field. Enter the business unit in the Business Unit field. Press Enter. Continue to Step 9.

Display the order process steps for an order number,

Display all customer types using a specific group size,

Enter the group size in the X-Ref Number field and press Enter. A list of the customer types for the group size appears.

Note: Page down to view the rest of the items in the list.

28-22

How to Use the Item Cross-Reference Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7. Skip to Step 9.

How to Use the Item Cross-Reference Inquiry Screen

28-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8.

Press F4 to unfold the data so you can verify the effective and expired dates for the item and confirm that the item is still valid.

9. Press F3 to exit this screen.

28-24

How to Use the Item Cross-Reference Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Summary Availability Inquiry screen allows you to view data for a specific battery type. You can view the number of batteries on-hand, the number of batteries committed for orders, and the number of batteries available.

Procedure
To use the Summary Availability Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Sales Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Order Inquiries screen appears.


5. Enter option 14, Summary Availability, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Summary Availability screen appears.

6. Enter the battery type in the Item Number field.

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen

28-25

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7. Press Enter. The screen displays data for the battery type.

Note:

Enter 1 in the O (option) field, and press enter to view detailed data for the item number. Enter 2 in the O (option) field, and press enter to view branch/plant data for the item number.

28-26

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

8. Enter another item number, or press F3 to exit this screen.

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen

28-27

Exide Technologies, Inc.

28-28

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Detailed Availability Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Detailed Availability Inquiry screen allows you to view detailed data for a battery type. You can view the number of batteries on-hand, the number of batteries committed for orders, and the number of batteries available.

Procedure
To use the Detailed Availability Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Sales Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Order Inquiries screen appears.


5. Enter option 15, Detailed Availability, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Detailed Availability screen appears.

6. Enter the battery type in the Item Number field.

How to Use the Detailed Availability Inquiry Screen

28-29

Exide Technologies, Inc.

7. Press Enter. The screen displays detailed data for the battery type.

8. Enter another item number to view, or press F3 to exit.

28-30

How to Use the Detailed Availability Inquiry Screen

Material Team Inquiries Module


How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen
Introduction
The Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) screen allows the viewing of detailed information for a purchase order.

Procedure
To use the Open Orders Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen

29-1

2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter and the Main Inquiry Menus screen appears.

29-2

How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen

4. Enter option 3, Material Team Inquiry Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter and the Material Inquiry Menu screen appears.

How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen

29-3

6. Enter option 2, Open Orders Non-Invntry (OP), on the command line.

7.

Press Enter and the Open Orders Non-Invntry (OP) screen appears.

29-4

How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen

8. Tab to the Order Number field, and enter an order number.

9. Press Enter. The purchase order information appears on the screen.

How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen

29-5

10. Enter a 2 in the O column next to the line of the purchase order you want to review.

11. Press Enter and the purchase order is displayed.

29-6

How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen

12. Press F4, Fold, to display more information about a line.

13. Press F15 to view the header information.

14. Press F3 to return to the Purchase Order Detail screen. 15. Press F3 to return to the Open Orders Non-Invntry (OP) screen. 16. Press F3 to exit. How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen 29-7

29-8

How to Use the Open Orders Non-Inventory (OP) Inquiry Screen

How to Use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Open Orders Inventory (OF) screen allows the viewing of detailed information for a purchase order.

Procedure
To use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Team Inquiry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, Open Orders Inventory (OF), then press Enter. The Opens Orders

Inventory (OF) screen appears.

How to Use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) Inquiry Screen

29-9

5. Enter the purchase order number in the Order Number field.

Note:

If the purchase order number is unknown, enter data in one of the other fields to narrow the search, then press Enter.

29-10

How to Use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) Inquiry Screen

6. Press Enter. The screen displays a listing of the process steps for the purchase order selected.

7. Tab to an O (option) column, and enter 2 to review the purchase order entry.

How to Use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) Inquiry Screen

29-11

8. Press Enter. The Purchase Order Detail screen appears and displays information for the

process step.

9. Press F4 to view additional purchase order step information.

29-12

How to Use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) Inquiry Screen

10. Press F15 to view header-level information.

11. Press F3 twice to return to the Open Orders Inventory (OF) screen or three times to return

to the Material Inquiry Menu screen.

How to Use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) Inquiry Screen

29-13

29-14

How to Use the Open Orders Inventory (OF) Inquiry Screen

How to Use the Open Orders Transfers (OT) Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Open Orders Transfers (OT) Inquiry screen allows you to view detailed information for the purchase order.

Procedure
To use the Open Orders Transfers Inquiry Screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Inquiry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Open Orders Transfers (OT), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Open Orders Transfers (OT) screen appears.

How to Use the Open Orders Transfers (OT) Inquiry Screen

29-15

5. Enter the purchase order number in the Order Number field and press Enter. The order

appears in the columns located in the middle of the screen. Note: If the purchase order number is unknown, it can be obtained by using any of the other fields to narrow your search.

29-16

How to Use the Open Orders Transfers (OT) Inquiry Screen

6. Enter a 2 in the O column next to the line of the purchase order.

7. Press Enter and the Purchase Order Detail screen appears.

How to Use the Open Orders Transfers (OT) Inquiry Screen

29-17

8. Press F4, Fold, for more information about a specific line, or press F15 to view the header

information.
9. Press F3 to return to the Open Orders Transfers (OT) screen.

10. Press F3 to exit.

29-18

How to Use the Open Orders Transfers (OT) Inquiry Screen

How to Use the Receipt Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Receipt Inquiry screen allows the viewing of the purchase order information.

Procedure
To use the Receipt Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 22, Material Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Material Inquiry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Receipt Inquiry, on the command line, then press Enter. The Receipt

Inquiry screen appears.

How to Use the Receipt Inquiry Screen

29-19

5. Tab to the Order Number field, and enter an order number.

6. Press Enter. The purchase order information appears on the screen.

29-20

How to Use the Receipt Inquiry Screen

7. Press F4 to view the product description.

8. Tab to an option field, and enter 5.

Note:

The option field is the one-character, unlabelled field located to the left of the Receipt column.

How to Use the Receipt Inquiry Screen

29-21

9. Press Enter to display additional receipt details.

10. Press F3 to close the Receipt Detail Information screen. The Receipt Inquiry screen

appears.
11. Continue to view receipt data, or press F3 to exit.

29-22

How to Use the Receipt Inquiry Screen

How to Use the PO/Receiving Audit Trail Inquiry Screen


Introduction
This procedure details the steps necessary to inquire on a PO/Receiving Audit Trail.

Procedure
To use the PO/Receiving Audit Trail Inquiry Screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 3, Material Team Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Inquiry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 11, PO/ Receiving Audit Trail, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PO/Receiving Audit Trail screen appears.

How to Use the PO/Receiving Audit Trail Inquiry Screen

29-23

5. Enter the purchase order number in the Order Number field.

6.

Press Enter and the order number appears in the Order column.

29-24

How to Use the PO/Receiving Audit Trail Inquiry Screen

7. Enter a 5 in the O field next to the line of the purchase order.

8. Press Enter and the Order Ledger Details screen appears.

Note:

If more than one line is to be reviewed at a time, continue to press Enter for each line that you want to review.

How to Use the PO/Receiving Audit Trail Inquiry Screen

29-25

9. Press F3 to return to the PO/Receiving Audit Trail screen.

10. Press F3 to exit.

29-26

How to Use the PO/Receiving Audit Trail Inquiry Screen

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Supply and Demand screen allows the viewing of the sources of supply and demand available-to-promise.

Procedure
To use the Supply and Demand screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 3, Material Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Material Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 22, Material Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Material Inquiry Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Supply/Demand Inquiry, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Supply/Demand Inquiry screen appears.

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

29-27

5. Enter the battery type in the Item Number field.

29-28

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

6. Press Enter. The screen displays supply and demand data for the battery.

Note:

To access more detail, enter in the appropriate O (option) column the desired option number from those specified at the bottom of the screen. Press Enter. The selected data appears. To modify data, refer to the appropriate procedure in the ABD JDE Reference Guide.

Note:

7. Continue to view supply and demand data, or press F3 to exit.

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

29-29

29-30

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

Operations Team Inquiries Module


How to Use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) Inquiry Screen
Introduction
The Item Ledger (The Cardex) screen enables the viewing of pertinent data about a specific item.

Procedure
To use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) Inquiry Screen

30-1

2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.

30-2

How to Use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) Inquiry Screen

3. Enter option 4, Operations Team Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter.

The Operations Team Inquiry Menu screen appears.

How to Use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) Inquiry Screen

30-3

4. Enter option 2, Item Ledger (The Cardex), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Item Ledger (The Cardex) screen appears.

30-4

How to Use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) Inquiry Screen

5. Enter the Exide part number in the Item Number field, and press Enter.

6. Tab to the O (option) field beside the appropriate document number, and enter 5.

How to Use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) Inquiry Screen

30-5

7. Press Enter. The Item Ledger Information screen appears displaying details for the

selected document number.

8. Press F3 to return to the Item Ledger (The Cardex) screen. 9. Select another document for inquiry, or press F3 to return to the Operations Team Inquiry

Menu screen.

30-6

How to Use the Item Ledger (The Cardex) Inquiry Screen

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Summary Availability allows the viewing of data for a specific battery type. The data includes the quantity of batteries: On-hand Committed for orders Available for orders

Procedure
To use the Summary Availability screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 2, Office Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Office Team

Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 2, Sales Order Entry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Sales Order Entry screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Sales Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Sales

Order Inquiry screen appears.


5. Enter option 14, Summary Availability, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Summary Availability screen appears.

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen

30-7

6. Enter the battery number in the Item Number field.

30-8

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen

7. Press Enter. The Summary Availability screen displays the batterys data.

8. Enter another item number, or press F3 to exit.

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen

30-9

30-10

How to Use the Summary Availability Inquiry Screen

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Supply and Demand screen allows the viewing of the sources of supply and demand available-to-promise.

Procedure
To use the Supply and Demand screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

30-11

3. Enter option 4, Planning Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.

30-12

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

4. Enter option 22, Planning Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Planning Inquiries screen appears.

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

30-13

5. Enter option 3, Supply and Demand, on the command line, then press Enter. The Supply

and Demand screen appears.

6. Enter the battery type in the Item Number field.

30-14

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

7. Press Enter. The screen displays supply and demand data for the battery.

Note:

To access more detail, enter in the appropriate O (option) field the desired option number from those specified at the bottom of the screen. Press Enter. The selected data appears. To modify data refer to the appropriate procedure in the ABD JDE Reference Guide.

Note:

8. Continue to view supply and demand data, or press F3 to exit.

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

30-15

30-16

How to Use the Supply and Demand Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Stock Locator Inquiries Module


How to Use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry Screen
Introduction
The Stock Locator by Type Inquiry screen displays location information by battery type.

Procedure
To use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry Screen

31-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Main Inquiry Menus screen appears.

31-2

How to Use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The Stock Locator menu screen appears.

How to Use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry Screen

31-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, Stock Locator by Type, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Select Records screen appears.

31-4

How to Use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays location information by battery type.

9. Press F3 to exit.

How to Use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry Screen

31-5

Exide Technologies, Inc.

31-6

How to Use the Stock Locator by Type Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Serial Number Lookup Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Serial Number Lookup Inquiry screen displays information by serial numbers.

Procedure
To use the Serial Number Lookup Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Serial Number Lookup, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the Test field of the MF$SER row, and enter the desired code in the Test field unless

you want to use the default code. Note: Press F1 to display the values for this field.

How to Use the Serial Number Lookup Inquiry Screen

31-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Value field of the MF$SER row, and enter the serial number or numbers for the

inquiry. Note: If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single serial number in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more serial numbers, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to numbers in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.

7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays information for the serial number.

8. Press F3 to exit.

31-8

How to Use the Serial Number Lookup Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Single Location Lookup Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Single Location Lookup Inquiry screen displays information for a specific location.

Procedure
To use the Single Location Lookup Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Single Location Lookup, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the Test field of the MF$LCN row.

Note:

Press F1 to display possible values.

How to Use the Single Location Lookup Inquiry Screen

31-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Value field of the MF$LCN row, and enter a location number.

Note:

If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single location in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more locations, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to locations in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.

7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays detailed information for the selected location.

8. Press F3 to exit.

31-10

How to Use the Single Location Lookup Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Single Type Lookup Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Single Type Lookup Inquiry screen displays detailed information for a specific battery type.

Procedure
To use the Single Type Lookup Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Single Type Lookup, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the Test field on the MFAITM row, and enter the desired code unless you want to

use the default code. Note: Press F1 to display the values for this field.

How to Use the Single Type Lookup Inquiry Screen

31-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Value field on the MFAITM row, and enter the battery type to search.

Note:

If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single battery type in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more battery types, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to battery types in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.

7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays information for the battery type selected.

8. Press F3 to exit.

31-12

How to Use the Single Type Lookup Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Stock Locator by Location Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Stock Locator by Location Inquiry screen displays information by location within the stock locator.

Procedure
To use the Stock Locator by Location Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Stock Locator by Location, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

How to Use the Stock Locator by Location Inquiry Screen

31-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays information sorted by location within the stock locator.

6. Press F3 to exit.

31-14

How to Use the Stock Locator by Location Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Stock Locator by Mfg. Date Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Stock Locator by Manufacturing Date Inquiry screen lists the batteries in stock by the date they were manufactured.

Procedure
To use the Stock Locator by Manufacturing Date Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Stock Locator by Mfg. Date, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

How to Use the Stock Locator by Mfg. Date Inquiry Screen

31-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays a list of batteries in stock. The list is organized by manufacturing date.

6. Press F3 to exit.

31-16

How to Use the Stock Locator by Mfg. Date Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Stock In Transit by Type Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Stock In Transit by Location Inquiry screen displays information by location within the stock locator.

Procedure
To use the Stock In Transit by Location Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu appears.


4. Enter option 9, Stock Intransit by Type, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

How to Use the Stock In Transit by Type Inquiry Screen

31-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays information by location within the stock locator.

6. Press F3 to exit.

31-18

How to Use the Stock In Transit by Type Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Stock History by Trans. Date Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Stock History by Transaction Date Inquiry screen displays information by the date the records were updated.

Procedure
To use the Stock History by Transaction Date Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 10, Stock History by Trans. Date, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the Test field on the $DATE row, and enter the desired code in the Test field unless

you want to use the default code. Note: Press F1 to display the values for this field.

How to Use the Stock History by Trans. Date Inquiry Screen

31-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Value field on the $DATE row, and enter the transaction date(s) for the inquiry.

Note:

If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single transaction date in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more transaction dates, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to dates in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.

7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays information by the date the records were updated.

8. Press F3 to exit.

31-20

How to Use the Stock History by Trans. Date Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Stock History by Serial Number Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Stock History by Serial Numbers Inquiry screen displays the history details for a specific serial number.

Procedure
To use the Stock History by Serial Numbers Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 11, Stock History by Serial Num., on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the Test field on the ML$SER row, and enter the desired code in the Test field unless

you want to use the default code. Note: Press F1 to display possible values.

How to Use the Stock History by Serial Number Inquiry Screen

31-21

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Value field on the ML$SER row, and enter a serial (pallet) number.

Note:

If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single serial number in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more serial numbers, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to numbers in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space.

7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays history data for the serial number.

8. Press F3 to exit.

31-22

How to Use the Stock History by Serial Number Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Stock Move History Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Stock Move History Inquiry screen displays detailed information by battery type and time of day.

Procedure
To use the Stock Move History Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 24, Main Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The Main

Inquiry Menus screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Stock Locator Inquiry Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Stock Locator menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 12, Stock Move History, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the Test field on the ML$LCN row, and enter the desired code in the Test field

unless you want to use the default code. Note: Press F1 to display the values for this field.

How to Use the Stock Move History Inquiry Screen

31-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Tab to the Value field on the ML$LCN row, and enter the location(s) for the inquiry search.

Note:

If you entered EQ in the Test field, enter a single location in the Value field. If you entered LIST in the Test field, enter two or more locations, each in single quotes, in the Value field, separated by a blank space. If you entered RANGE in the Test field, enter the from and the to locations in single quotes in the Value field, separated by a blank space. Press Enter.

7.

The message Query running appears at the bottom of the screen.

Note:

Upon completion, the screen displays detailed information by battery type and time of day.

8. Press F3 to exit.

31-24

How to Use the Stock Move History Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

Routing Inquiries Module


How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen
Introduction
The Trip Master Inquiry screen allows you to assign carriers, designated doors, and other data to trips leaving a distribution center.

Procedure
To use the Trip Master Inquiry screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

32-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The Operations Team Menu screen appears.

32-2

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The DC Routing Menu screen appears.

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

32-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 3, Trip Master Inquiry, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Trip Master Inquiry screen appears.

32-4

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Perform one of the following steps:

IF the trip number You want to edit or display appears on the screen, You want to edit or display is not displayed on the screen,

THEN Skip to Step 9. Enter the desired trip number in the Position To field and press Enter. The Trip Master Inquiry screen appears with the selected trip number at the top of the list. THEN Type 5. Press Enter. The Trip Master Maintenance screen appears displaying the trip data. Skip to Step 9. Type 2. Press Enter. The Trip Master Maintenance screen appears displaying the trip data.

9. Tab to the appropriate OP field (option), and perform one of the following steps:

IF you want to Display trip data,

Edit trip data,

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

32-5

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Change or add information as needed.

Note:

Not all fields can be changed.

11. Press Enter. The changes are saved. 12. Press F3 to return to the Trip Master Inquiry screen. 13. Select another trip number for display or editing, or press F3 to return to the DC Routing

Menu screen.

32-6

How to Use the Trip Master Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Dept. Screen


Introduction
The Open Order Inquiry by Dept. screen enables you to view all open orders for a specific customer.

Procedure
To use the Open Order Inquiry by Dept screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Open Order Inquiry by Dept, on the command line.

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Dept. Screen

32-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Open Order Inquiry by Dept screen appears.

32-8

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Dept. Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter the desired department number in the Department field, and press Enter. The screen

displays the open orders for the customer. The open order information is sorted by date and customer. Note: If you press Enter without entering a department number, the screen displays all open orders for all customers.

Note:

The asterisk (*) appears to the right of the Quantity to Pick field if a pick number has already been assigned.

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Dept. Screen

32-9

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press F4 to display additional details, such as trip number and status.

8. Press F3 to exit.

32-10

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Dept. Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Date Inquiry Screen


Introduction
The Open Order Inquiry by Date screen enables one to view all open orders for all customers.

Procedure
To use the Open Order Inquiry by Date screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 5, Routing Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC Routing

Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Open Order Inquiry by Date, on the command line.

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Date Inquiry Screen

32-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Open Order Inquiry by Date screen appears.

32-12

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Date Inquiry Screen

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter a date in the Required Date field, and press Enter. The screen displays open orders

beginning with orders for the required date selected. The open order information is sorted by date and customer. Note: If you press Enter without entering a required date, the screen displays all open orders for all customers.

Note:

The asterisk (*) appears to the right of the Quantity to Pick field if a pick number has already been assigned.

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Date Inquiry Screen

32-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press F4 to display additional details, such as trip number and status.

8. Press F3 to exit.

32-14

How to Use the Open Order Inquiry by Date Inquiry Screen

Planning Inquiries Module


How to Use the Enter/Change Forecast
Introduction
The Enter/Change Forecast screen displays the estimated forecast information for item numbers. The forecast information is sorted by date and customer.

Procedure
To use the Enter/Change Forecast screen, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team, on the command line, then press Enter. The Operations

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menus, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 11, Enter/Change Forecast, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Enter/Change Forecast screen appears.

5. View the desired data. 6. Press F3 to exit.

How to Use the Enter/Change Forecast

33-1

33-2

How to Use the Enter/Change Forecast

How to Use the Item Master Information


Introduction
The Item Master Information displays information pertaining to the item setup.

Procedure
To use the Item Master Information, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 12, Item Master Information, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Item Master Information screen appears.

5. Type I in the Action Code field. 6. Perform the following steps to search for battery information:

IF you want to search for Information for a finished battery number key, Information for a basic battery,

THEN Tab to the Product No field and enter the battery type. Tab to the Catalog No field and enter the battery type.

How to Use the Item Master Information

33-3

7. Press Enter. The batterys information appears.

8. Use the function keys to obtain additional information, or press F3 to exit.

33-4

How to Use the Item Master Information

How to Use the Supply and Demand


Introduction
The supply and demand display enables the reviewing of the sources of supply and demand available to promise.

Procedure
To review the supply and demand display, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Planning Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Planning Inquiries screen appears.


5. Enter option 3, Supply and Demand, on the command line, then press Enter. The Supply

and Demand screen appears.

6. Enter the battery type in the Item Number field.

How to Use the Supply and Demand

33-5

7. Press Enter. The batterys data appears.

Note:

To access more detail per line, enter the appropriate option in the O column, then press Enter. To modify the data, refer to the menu options at the bottom of the screen.

8. Continue to review supply and demand or press F3 to quit.

33-6

How to Use the Supply and Demand

How to Use the Multi-Level BOM Inquiry


Introduction
The Multi Level BOM Inquiry displays the Bill of Materials contents for a specific finished number.

Procedure
To use the Multi Level BOM Inquiry, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Planning Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Planning Inquiries screen appears.


5. Enter option 6, Multi Level BOM Inquiry, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Multi Level BOM Inquiry screen appears.

How to Use the Multi-Level BOM Inquiry

33-7

6. Enter the item number in the Parent Item field, then press Enter.

7. Use the function keys to obtain additional information. For example, press F4 to view

effective dates.

8. Press F3 to exit.

33-8

How to Use the Multi-Level BOM Inquiry

How to Use the Multi-Level Where Used


Introduction
The Multi Level Where Used allows the entering of a component kit and reveals the finished BOMs for which this item is used.

Procedure
To use the Multi Level Where Used, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 4, Operations Team Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Operations Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 4, Planning Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Production Scheduling & Inquiries screen appears.


4. Enter option 22, Planning Inquiries Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The DC

Planning Inquiries screen appears.


5. Enter option 7, Multi Level Where Used, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Multi Level Where Used screen appears.

How to Use the Multi-Level Where Used

33-9

6. Enter the item number in the Component Number field, then press Enter.

7. Use the function keys to obtain additional information. For example, press F4 to view

effective dates.

8. Press F3 to exit.

33-10

How to Use the Multi-Level Where Used

Exide Technologies, Inc.

PARC Reports Module


How to Run a Battery Activity Report
Introduction
The battery activity report allows for balancing within PARC.

Procedure
To run a battery activity report for PARC, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen.

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

34-1

Exide Technologies, Inc. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line.

3. Press Enter. The PARC Team Menu screen appears.

34-2

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 4. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line.

5. Press Enter. The PARC Reports Menu screen appears.

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

34-3

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter option 2, Battery Activity Report, on the command line.

7. Press Enter. The Battery Activity Report screen appears.

8. Verify that the information in the Begining Fiscal Date (MMDDYY) and Fiscal Period

fields is correct.
34-4 How to Run a Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter. The PARC Reports Menu screen appears and displays the message Battery

Activity Report submitted to batch at the bottom of the screen.

10. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

34-5

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-6

How to Run a Battery Activity Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an RMA Returns Report


Introduction
The RMA (Returns Merchandise Authorization) report enables the viewing of problems related to previously entered credit orders that may have occurred during credit order entry on any batteries returned to the distribution center.

Procedure
To run an RMA Returns report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 3, RMA Returns, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select Records

screen appears.

How to Run an RMA Returns Report

34-7

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Tab to the row containing $DATE, and enter the date range in the Value field. 6. Page down to the row containing SDADDJ, and enter the second date range.

Note:

The second date range will be same as the first, except entered in the Julian format.

7. Press Enter. After the records are processed, the report will print. The PARC Reports

Menu screen appears.


8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

34-8

How to Run an RMA Returns Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report


Introduction
The Transit Orders In Transit report allows you to view inventory that has left the shipping locations, but has not yet arrived at the receiving location.

Procedure
To run an in Transfer Orders In Transit report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 4, Transfer Orders In Transit, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Transit Orders In Transit submitted to batch appears.

5. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report

34-9

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-10

How to Run a Transfer Orders In Transit Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report


Introduction
The Open Transfers Orders report lists all transfer orders that are not received.

Procedure
To run an Open Transfers Orders report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 5, Open Transfer Orders, on the command line.

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report

34-11

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The message Open Transfer Orders submitted to batch appears at the bottom

of the screen.

6. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu.

34-12

How to Run an Open Transfer Orders Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report


Introduction
The Transfer Orders Shipped report enables the viewing of problems that may have occurred in transferring orders shipped from one distribution center to another. The report gives the order number, order type, quantity shipped, and other pertinent information about the transfer.

Procedure
To run a Transfer Orders Shipped report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 6, Transfer Orders Shipped, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Transfer Orders Shipped screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing Transfer Orders Shipped, and type 2 in the OP column.

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report

34-13

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears.

7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

34-14

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

9. Tab to the row containing Actual Ship, and enter the appropriate ship date in the Selection

Value column.
10. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window reappears. 11. Press Enter. The Transfer Orders Shipped screen reappears. 12. Type 1 in the OP column of the Transfer Orders Shipped row.

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report

34-15

Exide Technologies, Inc. 13. Press Enter. Submitted appears at the end of the row.

14. Press F3 to exit.

34-16

How to Run a Transfer Orders Shipped Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report


Introduction
The Transfer Receipts (Batteries) report compares the paperwork from physical receipts to what was received for daily balancing requirements according to JD Edwards.

Procedure
To run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 7, Transfer Receipts (Batteries), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Transfer Receipts (Batteries) screen appears.

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report

34-17

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter 2 in the OP column by TRNSFRRCPT.

6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears.

34-18

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Enter 1 in the 1 column adjacent to Data Selection.

8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report

34-19

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Enter the appropriate date in the G/L Date field of the corresponding Selection Value

column, then press Enter three times. The Transfer Receipts (Batteries) screen reappears.

10. Enter 1 in the OP column by TRNSFRRCPT.

34-20

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Press Enter. Submitted appears at the end of the row.

12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report

34-21

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-22

How to Run a Transfer Receipts (Batteries) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report


Introduction
The Items/Orders Shipped by Trip report allows the viewing of problems that may have occurred to items or an order to be shipped on a trip.

Procedure
To run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 8, Items/Order Shipped by Trip, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Items/Order Shipped by Trip screen appears.

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

34-23

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Tab to the row containing SOE0003, and enter 2 in the OP column.

6. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears.

34-24

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

8. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

34-25

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Enter the actual ship date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter.

The Selective Change Prompt window reappears.

10. Press Enter three times. The Items/Order Shipped by Trip screen reappears.

34-26

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 11. Enter 1 in the OP column in the row containing SOE003, then press Enter. The message

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

12. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

34-27

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-28

How to Run an Items/Orders Shipped by Trip Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report PARC Report


Introduction
A Daily Orders Report PARC report identifies the orders of a PARC center.

Procedure
To run a Daily Orders Report PARC report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 9, Daily Orders Report PARC, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Daily Orders Report PARC screen appears.

5. Enter the type of date, from the list, in the Enter report based on date field. 6. Press Tab and enter the actual date in the Enter Date (MMDDYY) field. 7. Press Tab and enter the format for the report in the For Summary Report field. 8. Press Enter, and the PARC Reports Menu reappears. The message Daily Orders Report

PARC submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.


9. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report PARC Report

34-29

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-30

How to Run a Daily Orders Report PARC Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report by Customer Report


Introduction
A Daily Orders Report by Customer report identifies the orders placed by a specific customer at a PARC center.

Procedure
To run a Daily Orders Report by Customer report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 10, Daily Orders Report By Cust., on the command line, then press Enter.

The Daily Orders Report DC screen appears.

5. Enter the type of date, from the list, in the Enter report based on date field. 6. Press Tab and enter the actual date in the Enter Date (MMDDYY) field. 7. Press Tab and enter the format for the report in the For Summary Report field. 8. Press Enter, and the PARC Reports Menu reappears. The Daily Orders Report By Cust.

submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.


9. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Daily Orders Report by Customer Report

34-31

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-32

How to Run a Daily Orders Report by Customer Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report


Introduction
The Open Orders by Customer report enables the viewing of all orders that are not shipped for a specific customer.

Procedure
To run an Open Orders by Customer report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 11, Open Orders by Customer, on the command line, then press Enter. The

message Open Orders by Customer submitted to batch appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu.

How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report

34-33

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-34

How to Run an Open Orders by Customer Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report


Introduction
The Daily Orders Shipped report enables one to view problems that may have occurred in daily orders that were shipped.

Procedure
To run a Daily Orders Shipped report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 12, Daily Orders Shipped, on the command line. The Daily Orders Shipped

screen appears.

5. Enter 2 in the OP column in the row containing Daily Orders Shipped, then press Enter.

The Selective Change Prompt window appears.

How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report

34-35

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Enter 1 in the row containing Data Selection, then press Enter. The Data Selection screen

appears.

7. Tab to the row containing Actual Ship, and enter the ship date in the Selection Value

column.
8. Press Enter to accept the data. The Selective Change Prompt window reappears. 9. Press Enter. The Daily Orders Shipped screen reappears.

34-36

How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Enter 1 in the OP column in the row containing Daily Orders Shipped, then press Enter.

The message Submitted appears at the end of the row.

11. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report

34-37

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-38

How to Run a Daily Orders Shipped Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Ship By Trip Report


Introduction
The Ship by Trip report provides summarized order information for specified trips by sequence.

Procedure
To run a Ship by Trip report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 14, Ship by Trip, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select Records

screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing $SHIPDATE, and enter the search comparison value in the Test

column. Note: Press F1 in the field to view possible values.

6. Tab to the Value column, and enter the appropriate date(s) to search.

How to Run a Ship By Trip Report

34-39

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. When

the query finishes, the PARC Reports Menu screen appears.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

34-40

How to Run a Ship By Trip Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report


Introduction
The Stock Locator by Type report lists all the locations for a specific battery type.

Procedure
To run a Stock Locator by Type report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 15, Stock Locator by Type, on the command line.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report

34-41

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Select Records screen appears.

6. Press Enter to run the query. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the

screen. Upon completion, the PARC Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

34-42

How to Run a Stock Locator by Type Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report


Introduction
The Serial Number Lookup report allows the details of a pallet(s) to print for specific serial numbers.

Procedure
To run a Serial Number Lookup report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 16, Serial Number Lookup, on the command line.

How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report

34-43

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Select Records screen appears.

6. Tab to the row containing MF$SER, and enter the search comparison value in the Test

column. Note: Press F1 in the field to view possible values.

7. Tab to the Value column, and enter the serial number to search.

34-44

How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 8. Press Enter to run the query. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the

screen. Upon completion, the PARC Reports Menu screen appears.

9. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report

34-45

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-46

How to Run a Serial Number Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report


Introduction
The Single Location Lookup report enables one to locate the type of stock in a single stock location, such as 5555Z.

Procedure
To run a Single Location Lookup report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 17, Single Location Lookup, on the command line.

How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report

34-47

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Select Records screen appears.

6. Tab to the Value column, and enter the appropriate stock location in single quotes

Note:

Press F11 to display the meaning of values in the Field column..

34-48

How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter to run the query. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the

screen. Upon completion, the PARC Reports Menu screen appears.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report

34-49

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-50

How to Run a Single Location Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Single Type Lookup Report


Introduction
The single type lookup finds the location of a specific type of battery.

Procedure
To run a Single Type Lookup report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Report Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Main Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 18, Single Type Lookup, on the command line, then press Enter. The Select

Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing MFAITM, and enter the appropriate basic or 90 number in quotes

in the Value column. Note: In the Test field, enter EQ for a single lookup or LIST for multiple lookups. Press F11 to display the meaning of values in the Field column.

How to Run a Single Type Lookup Report

34-51

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the PARC Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

34-52

How to Run a Single Type Lookup Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Location Report


Introduction
The Stock Locator by Location report identifies the location of all the specific battery types in the distribution center.

Procedure
To run a Stock Locator by Location report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 19, Stock Locator by Location, on the command line.

How to Run a Stock Locator by Location Report

34-53

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Press Enter. The Select Records screen appears.

6. Press Enter to run the query. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the

screen. Upon completion, the PARC Reports Menu screen appears.

7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

34-54

How to Run a Stock Locator by Location Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock In Transit by Type Report


Introduction
The Stock In Transit by Type report identifies the batteries being shipped to the PARC center by a specific type of battery.

Procedure
To run a Stock In Transit by Type report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 20, Stock Intransit by Type, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.


5. Press Enter to run the query. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the

screen. Upon completion, the PARC Reports Menu screen appears.

6. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Stock In Transit by Type Report

34-55

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-56

How to Run a Stock In Transit by Type Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Stock History by Transaction Date Report


Introduction
The Stock History by Transaction Date report details the stock inventory by transactions from the PARC center.

Procedure
To run a Stock History by Transaction Date report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 21, Stock History by Trans. Date, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Select Records screen appears.

5. Tab to the row containing $DATE, and enter the range of dates to search in the Value

column.
6. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


7. Press F12 to exit the menu.

How to Run a Stock History by Transaction Date Report

34-57

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-58

How to Run a Stock History by Transaction Date Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Conversion (Type to Type) Report


Introduction
An N conversion is a type to type conversion for batteries.

Procedure
To run an N Conversion (Type to Type) Report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 24, Additional PARC Reports, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Additional PARC Reports screen appears.


5. Enter option 2, N Conversion (Type to Type), on the command line, then press Enter. The

N Conversion (Type to Type) screen appears.

6. Tab to the row containing N Conversion (Type to Type), and type 2 in the OP column. 7. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears. 8. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run a Conversion (Type to Type) Report

34-59

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

10. Enter the order date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter. The

Selective Change Prompt window reappears.


11. Press Enter. The N Conversion (Type to Type) screen reappears.

34-60

How to Run a Conversion (Type to Type) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Enter 1 in the OP column of the row containing N Conversion (Type to Type), then press

Enter. Submitted appears at the end of the row.

13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a Conversion (Type to Type) Report

34-61

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-62

How to Run a Conversion (Type to Type) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report


Introduction
The Conversion Junk report allows you to view problems that have occurred during the conversion of junk batteries in the inventory.

Procedure
To run a Conversion of Junk report for PARC, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 24, Additional PARC Reports, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Additional PARC Reports screen appears.


5. Enter option 3, Conversion (Junk), on the command line.

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report

34-63

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The Conversion (Junk) screen appears.

7. Tab to the OP field next to the Conversion (Junk) description, and enter 2. 8. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears. 9. Tab to the 1 field beside the Data Selection function, and enter 1.

34-64

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 10. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

11. Tab to the Selection Value field on the Order Date row, and enter the order date. 12. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears. 13. Press Enter. The Conversion (Junk) screen appears. 14. Tab to the OP field next to the Conversion (Junk) description, and enter 1.

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report

34-65

Exide Technologies, Inc. 15. Press Enter. The screen displays with a message indicating that a batch job has been

submitted to generate the report.

16. Press F3 to exit the screen.

34-66

How to Run a Conversion (Junk) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report


Introduction
The Conversion (Blem) report allows you to view problems that have occurred during the conversion of blem batteries in the inventory.

Procedure
To run a Conversion (Blem) report for PARC, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 24, Additional PARC Reports, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Additional PARC Reports screen appears.

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report

34-67

Exide Technologies, Inc. 5. Enter option 4, Conversion (Blem), on the command line, then press Enter. The

Conversion (Blem) screen appears.

6. Tab to the OP field next to the Conversion (Blem) description, and enter 2. 7. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears. 8. Tab to the 1 field beside the Data Selection function, and enter 1.

34-68

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

10. Tab to the Selection Value field on the Order Date row, and enter the order date. 11. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears. 12. Press Enter. The Conversion (Blem) screen appears. 13. Tab to the OP field next to the Conversion (Blem) description, and enter 1.

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report

34-69

Exide Technologies, Inc. 14. Press Enter. The screen displays with a message that a batch job has been submitted to

generate the report.

15. Press F3 to exit the screen.

34-70

How to Run a Conversion (Blem) Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report


Introduction
A CC Cycle Count Conversion report identifies adjustments to a location.

Procedure
To run a CC Cycle Count Conversion report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 24, Additional PARC Reports, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Additional PARC Reports screen appears.


5. Enter option 5, CC Cycle Count Conversion, on the command line, then press Enter. The

CC Cycle Count Conversion screen appears.

6. Tab to the row containing CC Conversion (Cycle Count), and type 2 in the OP column. 7. Press Enter. The Selective Change Prompt window appears. 8. Tab to the row containing Data Selection, and type 1 in the 1 column.

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report

34-71

Exide Technologies, Inc. 9. Press Enter. The Data Selection screen appears.

10. Enter the order date in the corresponding Selection Value column, then press Enter. The

Selective Change Prompt window reappears.


11. Press Enter. The CC Cycle Count Conversion screen reappears.

34-72

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report

Exide Technologies, Inc. 12. Enter 1 in the OP column of the row containing Conversion (Blem), then press Enter.

Submitted appears at the end of the row.

13. Press F3 to exit.

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report

34-73

Exide Technologies, Inc.

34-74

How to Run a CC Cycle Count Conversion Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Non-Shipped Order Summary Report


Introduction
The Non-Shipped Order Summary report identifies all the orders that have a status other than shipped. This enables one to view any orders pending shipment.

Procedure
To run a Non-Shipped Order Summary report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 24, Additional PARC Reports, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Additional PARC Reports screen appears.


5. Enter option 6, Non Shipped Order Summary, on the command line. The Select Records

screen appears.

6. Tab to the row containing SDNXTR, and enter the desired range for the status code in the

Value column.

How to Run a Non-Shipped Order Summary Report

34-75

Exide Technologies, Inc. 7. Press Enter. The message Query running appears at the bottom left of the screen. Upon

completion, the Additional PARC Reports screen appears.

8. Press F12 to exit the menu.

34-76

How to Run a Non-Shipped Order Summary Report

Exide Technologies, Inc.

How to Run a Credit Orders Less than 560 Report


Introduction
The Credit Orders Less than 560 report verifies that credits entered have been confirmed.

Procedure
To run a Credit Orders Less than 560 report, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Distribution Center Processing Menu screen. 2. Enter option 5, PARC Operations, on the command line, then press Enter. The PARC

Team Menu screen appears.


3. Enter option 23, Main PARC Reports Menu, on the command line, then press Enter. The

PARC Reports Menu screen appears.


4. Enter option 24, Additional PARC Reports, on the command line, then press Enter. The

Additional PARC Reports screen appears.


5. Enter option 7, Credit Orders Less than 560, on the command line.

How to Run a Credit Orders Less than 560 Report

34-77

Exide Technologies, Inc. 6. Press Enter. The message Credit Orders Less than 560 submitted to batch appears at the

bottom of the screen.

7. Press F12 to exit to the previous menu.

34-78

How to Run a Credit Orders Less than 560 Report

INDEX
A
action codes ................................................................... 1-3 active printers working with ............................................................ 13-9 activity reports .............................................................. 1-7 adding to a pallet in pick verification........................ 5-31 adjustment conversion from blem............................................... 8-43 conversion from junk................................................ 8-47 conversion from WIP ............................................... 8-39 cycle count conversion ............................................. 8-31 inventory to corporate junk ........................................ 8-9 inventory to junk ...................................................... 8-15 junk EAs to LBs ....................................................... 8-51 recover from blem .................................................... 8-27 recover from junk ..................................................... 8-19 type-to-type ................................................................ 8-1 WIP receipt............................................................... 8-35 approval delegation using ....................................................................... 14-53 approval review option using the ................................................................. 14-49 PARC...................................................................... 15-63 conversion (blem) report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-67 conversion (junk) report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-63 conversion (type to type) report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-59 conversion from blem (BF) PARC, performing a ............................................... 19-55 conversion from blem adjustment (BF)..................... 8-43 conversion from junk PARC, performing a ............................................... 19-61 conversion from junk adjustment (JF) ...................... 8-47 conversion from WIP (WF) PARC, performing a ............................................... 19-49 conversion from WIP adjustment (WF) .................... 8-39 conversion of junk EAs to LBs PARC, performing a ............................................... 19-67 corporate junk adjustment PARC, performing a ................................................. 19-9 costed stock status report running a ................................................................... 24-9 credit - customer junks CJ PARC, entering....................................................... 15-47 credit - damage CD PARC...................................................................... 15-15 credit - rotations CP PARC, entering....................................................... 15-35 credit - shortage CS PARC, entering a ...................................................... 15-1 credit - stockilft CL PARC, entering a .................................................... 15-29 credit only CC PARC, entering a .................................................... 15-23 credit orders less than 560 report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-77 credit-refused CR PARC, entering a ...................................................... 15-9 customer backorders report running a ................................................................... 22-7 customer sales orders (SG) entering .......................................................................2-1 customer sales orders SG PARC, entering....................................................... 15-67 customer service inquiring on............................................................... 28-1 customer service report/branch ops report running a ................................................................. 24-31 customer service reports by branch report running a ................................................................. 24-33 customer service reports by parent # report running a ................................................................. 24-35 cycle count performing a.............................................................. 10-1 performing a conversion ......................................... 10-15 cycle count conversion (CC) PARC, performing a ............................................... 19-39

B
backorder batch releasing ................................................................... 2-45 backorders in advance creating..................................................................... 2-41 battery activity report PARC, running a ...................................................... 34-1 running a...................................................... 24-23, 27-21 blem conversion report running a................................................................. 27-39 boost in multiple to eaches..................................................... 9-23 boost out eaches to multiple..................................................... 9-25 branch/plant location changing or deleting ............................................... 12-11 entering or adding..................................................... 12-1

C
capital equip, sanction (OS) entering a................................................................ 14-17 common foundations..................................................... 1-1 complimentary sales (SP) orders entering..................................................................... 2-17 computer directed move performing a ............................................................... 9-1 confirm shipment PARC ..................................................................... 18-21 performing................................................................ 6-17 confirming credits

cycle count conversion adjustment (CC)................... 8-31 cycle count conversion report PARC, running a .................................................... 34-71 running a................................................................. 27-43 cycle count conversions PARC ..................................................................... 20-17

entering ................................................................... 10-11 PARC...................................................................... 20-13 finishing line schedule report running a ................................................................. 24-49 full pallet picking using ......................................................................... 5-77 function keys..................................................................1-3

D
daily orders reort by customer report PARC, running a .................................................... 34-31 daily orders report PARC, running a .................................................... 34-29 daily orders report by customer report runnin a .................................................................. 24-17 daily orders report DC report running a................................................................. 24-14 daily orders shipped report PARC, running a .................................................... 34-35 running a................................................................. 27-19 DC summary report running a................................................................. 24-27 delivery notes inquiring on ............................................................ 28-15 detailed availability inquiring on ............................................................ 28-29 device status working with .......................................................... 13-13 directed putaway move perfroming a ............................................................. 9-33 directed receipt............................................................ 7-23

H
hidden selections............................................................1-2 history by user name report running a ................................................................. 24-51

I
inquiries customer service ....................................................... 28-1 detailed availability................................................. 28-29 EDI-display download runtimes ............................. 28-19 item cross reference ................................................ 28-21 item ledger (Cardex) ................................................. 30-1 multi level BOM inquiry........................................... 33-7 open order by date screen ....................................... 32-11 open order by department screen .............................. 32-7 open orders inventory ............................................... 29-9 open orders non-inventory ........................................ 29-1 open orders transfers............................................... 29-15 PARC stock history by serial number ....................... 20-7 pick production scheduling ....................................... 4-15 PO/receiving audit trail ........................................... 29-23 pre-finished production scheduling........................... 4-13 receipt ..................................................................... 29-19 sales ledger screen .................................................... 28-9 serial number lookup ................................................ 31-7 stock history by serial number .................................. 10-5 stock history by serial numbers............................... 11-17 stock locator by type ................................................. 31-1 summary availabilty.......................................28-25, 30-7 supply and demand ......................................29-27, 30-11 trip master screen ...........................................16-19, 32-1 inventory planning guide (basic) report running a ................................................................... 24-1 inventory planning guide (components) report running an ................................................................. 24-7 inventory planning guide (finished) report running an ................................................................. 24-5 inventory PO entry (OI) entering an .............................................................. 14-21 inventory PO receipts report running a ................................................................. 23-17 inventory PO's printing...................................................................... 23-1 inventory purchase orders receipts report running an ............................................................... 27-47 inventory tags report submitting an .......................................................... 11-29 inventory to blem adjustment (H) PARC, performing a ............................................... 19-27 inventory to corporate junk adjustments ....................8-9 inventory to junk adjustment (E)............................... 8-15 PARC...................................................................... 19-15

E
EDI-display download runtimes inquiring on ............................................................ 28-19 employee/casual sales SX entering................................................................... 15-75 enter/change forecast using the ................................................................... 33-1 exide non-JDE (EO) orders entering..................................................................... 2-11 exisitng orders adding to................................................................... 2-53 existing inventory purchase orders cancelling ............................................................... 14-37 existing inventory/supplier (OF) adding/changing ..................................................... 14-33 existing orders cancelling lines on .................................................... 2-57 existing trip (route) manually adding to an .............................................. 3-11

F
fill % by business unit/ship to report running a................................................................. 24-37 fill % by ship to report running a................................................................. 24-41 fill % by SKU # report running a................................................................. 24-45 final count keying

Index

I-2

inventory/supplier (OF) entering an.............................................................. 14-13 invnetory to blem adjustment (H) ............................. 8-23 item cross reference inquiring on ............................................................ 28-21 item ledger (Cardex) inquiry screen ........................................................... 30-1 item master information using ......................................................................... 33-3 items/orders shipped by trip report PARC, running an .................................................. 34-23 running an............................................................... 27-15

N
non PF customer detail report running a ................................................................. 26-25 non-inventory supplier (OP) entering ..................................................................... 14-1 Non-JDE EO orders entering ................................................................... 15-81 non-shipped order summary report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-75 running a ................................................................. 26-21

J
junk conversion report running a................................................................. 27-35 junk EAs to LBs adjustment (JW) ............................ 8-51 junk shipments to Smelter SI entering................................................................... 15-89

O
open inventory PO's by vendor running.................................................................... 23-15 open order inquiry by date inquiry screen using the.................................................................. 32-11 open order inquiry by department screen using the.................................................................... 32-7 open orders bu customer report running an ................................................................. 22-1 open orders by customer report PARC, running an................................................... 34-33 open orders inventory inquiry screen............................................................ 29-9 open orders non-inventory inquiry screen............................................................ 29-1 open orders reort sum by day report running an ............................................................... 22-13 open orders transfers inquiry screen.......................................................... 29-15 open transfer orders report PARC, running ....................................................... 34-11 running a ................................................................. 23-13 running an ............................................................... 22-11 order service report sum (Sam's) running an ............................................................... 22-15 order service report sum (Wal-Mart) ...................... 22-21 orders awaiting approval viewing ................................................................... 14-45 orders to be routed detailed report running a ................................................................... 26-5 orders to be routed summary report running a ................................................................. 26-11 orders without pick numbers report running a ................................................................. 26-15

K
K-mart credit - customer junks CJ PARC, entering ...................................................... 15-55 k-mart credits - rotations CP PARC, entering ...................................................... 15-41

L
load completion PARC ..................................................................... 18-15 load completions perfroming................................................................ 6-13 loaded truck report running a................................................................. 26-31 location labels printing ................................................................... 12-21 location report running a................................................................. 25-13

M
manually adding to an existing trip PARC ....................................................................... 16-9 manually removing a pick from a trip PARC ..................................................................... 16-13 manually re-sequencing orders on a trip PARC ..................................................................... 16-15 manually routing orders PARC ....................................................................... 16-1 menu screen................................................................... 1-2 monthly conversion list report running a................................................................. 23-21 multi level BOM inquiry using the ................................................................... 33-7 multi level where used using ......................................................................... 33-9

P
P.O.R.S. running a ................................................................. 24-25 packing (closing) an order in pick verification ......... 5-47 PARC adding to a pallet in pick verification........................ 17-7 assigning a pick number.......................................... 15-99 confirm shipment .................................................... 18-21 confirming credits ................................................... 15-63 cycle count conversions .......................................... 20-17 cycle counting........................................................... 20-1 entering a credit - refused CR ................................... 15-9 entering a credit - rotations CP ............................... 15-35

Index

I-3

entering a credit - shortage CS ................................. 15-1 entering a credit - stocklift CL................................ 15-29 entering a credit only CC........................................ 15-23 entering a credit-damage CD.................................. 15-15 entering credit - customer junks CJ ........................ 15-47 entering customer sales orders SG.......................... 15-67 entering K-mart credit - customer junks CJ............ 15-55 entering K-Mart credit - rotations CP..................... 15-41 final count keying................................................... 20-13 load completion ...................................................... 18-15 manually adding to an existing trip .......................... 16-9 manually removing a pick from a trip .................... 16-13 manually re-sequencing orders on a trip................. 16-15 manually routing orders............................................ 16-1 open orders by customer report .............................. 34-33 packing (closing) an order in pick verification ....... 17-23 PARC, running a daily orders shipped report......... 34-35 performing a conversion from blem (BF)............... 19-55 performing a conversion from junk (JF)................. 19-61 performing a conversion from WIP (WF) .............. 19-49 performing a conversion of junk EAS to LBS (JW)19-67 performing a corporate junk adjustment................... 19-9 performing a cycle count conversion (CC)............. 19-39 performing a recover from blem (P) ....................... 19-33 performing a recover from junk adjustment (K)..... 19-21 performing a type to type adjustment ....................... 19-1 performing a WIP receipt adjustment (WR)........... 19-45 performing an inventory to blem adjustment.......... 19-27 performing an inventory to junk adjustment (E)..... 19-15 performing pick verification..................................... 17-1 performing truck loading.......................................... 18-1 picked pallet maintenance ...................................... 17-39 printing a packing slip in pick verification ............. 17-29 printing pick tickets from the trip assignment - trip build screen ................................................................. 16-23 reprinting shipping documents ............................... 18-25 running a battery activity report ............................... 34-1 running a conversion (blem) report ........................ 34-67 running a conversion (junk) report ......................... 34-63 running a conversion (type to type) report.............. 34-59 running a credit orders less than 560 report............ 34-77 running a cycle count conversion report................. 34-71 running a daily orders report .................................. 34-29 running a daily orders report by customer report.... 34-31 running a non-shipped order summary report......... 34-75 running a serial number lookup report.................... 34-43 running a ship by trip report ................................... 34-39 running a single location lookup report .................. 34-47 running a single type lookup report ........................ 34-51 running a stock history by transaction date report .. 34-57 running a stock in transit by type report ................. 34-55 running a stock locator by location report .............. 34-53 running a transfer orders in transit report ................. 34-9 running a transfer orders shipped report ................. 34-13 running a transfer receipts (batteries) report........... 34-17 running an items/orders shipped by trip report ....... 34-23 running an open transfer orders report.................... 34-11 running an RMA returns report ................................ 34-7 stock locator by type report .................................... 34-41 stock locator moves .................................................. 20-9 trip master maintenance screen............................... 16-27 unpicking batteries in pick verification .................. 17-15

un-truck loading........................................................ 18-9 working with active printers ..................................... 21-1 working with user spooled files ................................ 21-7 PARC processes........................................................... 1-11 PARC stock history by serial number inquiring on............................................................... 20-7 physical inventory beginning .................................................................. 11-1 posting .................................................................... 11-33 pick number assigning ................................................................... 2-33 PARC, assigning..................................................... 15-99 pick numbers for backorders assigning ................................................................... 2-37 pick production scheduling entering .......................................................................4-9 inquiring on............................................................... 4-15 pick verification adding to a pallet....................................................... 5-31 packing (closing) an order ........................................ 5-47 PARC........................................................................ 17-1 PARC adding to a pallet in pick verification ............ 17-7 PARC, closing (packing) an order .......................... 17-23 PARC, printing a packing slip ................................ 17-29 PARC, reprinting a pallet label ............................... 17-33 PARC, unpicking batteries...................................... 17-15 performing ................................................................ 5-27 printing a packing slip............................................... 5-53 reprinting a pallet label ............................................. 5-57 unpicking batteries.................................................... 5-39 picked pallet maintenance PARC...................................................................... 17-39 using ......................................................................... 5-69 picking pre-finished batteries..................................... 5-13 plant shipments report running a ................................................................. 24-29 PO/receiving audit trail inquiry screen.......................................................... 29-23 posting physical inventory ........................................ 11-33 pre-finished batteries picking ...................................................................... 5-13 unproducing ................................................................5-7 pre-finished customer detail report running a ................................................................. 26-23 pre-finished production processing ................................................................... 5-1 pre-finished production scheduling entering .......................................................................4-1 inquiring on............................................................... 4-13 printing inventory PO's........................................................... 23-1 location labels ......................................................... 12-21 specific inventory POs .............................................. 23-7 text labels................................................................ 12-25 printing a packing slip in pick verification................ 5-53 printing pick tickets from the trip assignment - trip build screen PARC...................................................................... 16-23 production recap ny line/user report running a ................................................................. 24-19 purcahse orders/non-inventory (OP) changing.................................................................. 14-41

Index

I-4

purchase order unreceiving............................................................... 7-19 purchased inventory on order report running a...................................................... 23-11, 24-11 purged trip numbers report running a................................................................. 26-27

Q
query working with .......................................................... 13-21

R
rebooting your scanner............................................. 13-23 recap of batteries by trip report running a................................................................. 24-53 receipt inquiry screen ......................................................... 29-19 receipt from exide non-JDE (EI) entering a................................................................ 14-29 receive by purchase order ............................................ 7-9 receive by serial number .............................................. 7-1 recover from blem (P) PARC, performing a............................................... 19-33 recover from blem adjustment (P) ............................ 8-27 recover from junk adjustment ................................... 8-19 recover from junk adjustment (K) PARC, performing a............................................... 19-21 regular move from a rack to the picking area ................................... 9-9 multiple storage location to a rack location .............. 9-13 reject repair to a multiple storage location................ 9-19 type location to a multiple storage location .............. 9-15 removing apick from a trip manually................................................................... 3-15 reprint documents PARC ..................................................................... 18-25 reprinting specific inventory POs.............................................. 23-9 reprinting a pallet label .............................................. 5-63 reprinting a pallet label in pick verification ............. 5-57 reprinting documents ................................................. 6-21 re-sequencing orders on a trip manually................................................................... 3-17 reverse by serial number ............................................ 7-15 RMA returns report PARC, running an .................................................... 34-7 running an............................................................... 27-13 routing an order manually..................................................................... 3-3

S
sales ledger screen inquiring on .............................................................. 28-9 scanner rebooting ................................................................ 13-23 scheduling pick production........................................................... 4-9 pre-finihsed production .............................................. 4-1 screen layouts ................................................................ 1-3

search types....................................................................1-4 serial number lookup report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-43 running a ................................................................... 25-7 serialized pallet maintenance performing .............................................................. 11-25 ship by trip report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-39 running a ................................................................. 27-25 ship to address temporarily changing a ............................................. 2-49 single location lookup report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-47 running a ................................................................... 25-9 single type lookup report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-51 running a ................................................................. 25-11 specific inventory POs printing...................................................................... 23-7 reprinting .................................................................. 23-9 split loads ..................................................................... 2-41 ST/OT receiving report running an ............................................................... 27-53 ST/OT report running an ............................................................... 27-51 starting printers........................................................... 13-1 stock history by serial number inquiring on............................................................... 10-5 stock history by serial number report running a ................................................................. 25-21 stock history by serial numbers inquiring on............................................................. 11-17 stock history by transaction date PARC, running a..................................................... 34-57 stock history by transaction date report running a ................................................................. 25-19 stock in transit by type report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-55 running a ................................................................. 25-17 stock locator by location report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-53 stock locator by manufacturing date report running a ................................................................. 25-15 stock locator by type report PARC, running a..................................................... 34-41 running a ................................................................... 25-1 stock locator inquiries by serial number ....................................................... 31-7 by type ...................................................................... 31-1 stock locator moves performing .....................................................10-7, 11-35 stock move history report running a ................................................................. 25-23 summary availability inquiring on............................................................. 28-25 inquiry screen............................................................ 30-7 supply and demand inquiry screen...............................................29-27, 30-11 using ......................................................................... 33-5

Index

I-5

T
tag keying performing.............................................................. 11-21 test batteries (TS) orders entering..................................................................... 2-27 text labels printing ................................................................... 12-25 transfer labels using boost in unproducing.............................................................. 9-31 transfer labels using boost out creating..................................................................... 9-27 transfer order by receiving report running a................................................................. 27-27 transfer order by shipping report running a................................................................. 27-29 transfer order to JD DC (ST/OT) entering..................................................................... 2-23 transfer orders in transit report PARC, running a ...................................................... 34-9 running a........................................................ 24-13, 27-1 transfer orders shipped report PARC, running a .................................................... 34-13 running a................................................................... 27-3 transfer receipts (batteries) report PARC, running a .................................................... 34-17 running a................................................................... 27-7 transfer receipts (components) report running a................................................................... 27-9 transfer to JDE DC ST/OT entering................................................................... 15-95 trip master inquiry screen PARC, using the..................................................... 16-19 using the .......................................................... 3-19, 32-1 trip master maintenance screen PARC ..................................................................... 16-27 using the ................................................................... 3-25 trip number tracking report running a................................................................... 26-1 trip run date changing the ............................................................... 4-7

truck loading PARC, performing .................................................... 18-1 performing ..................................................................6-1 truck stops routing using ...............................................................3-1 type to type adjustment (N) PARC, performing a ................................................. 19-1 type to type conversion report running a ................................................................. 27-31 type-to-type adjustments (N) ........................................8-1

U
unpicking batteries in pick verification ..................... 5-39 unproducing pre-finished batteries..............................5-7 unreceive by purchase order ...................................... 7-19 un-truck loading ............................................................6-9 PARC........................................................................ 18-9 user spooled files working with........................................................... 13-17

V
variance detail report submitting a ............................................................ 11-31 vary off device.............................................................. 13-3 vary on device .............................................................. 13-7 viewing default location maintenance...................... 12-17

W
warehouse layout definitions ........................................1-5 WIP receipt adjustment (WR) ................................... 8-35 PARC, performing a ............................................... 19-45 work day calendar entering ................................................................... 12-19 working with active printers PARC........................................................................ 21-1 working with user spooled files PARC........................................................................ 21-7

Index

I-6

Index

I-2

You might also like